Mark timeclock.el as being described in the manual.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d874e913 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-08-14
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
29support 64-bit executables. See etc/MACHINES for instructions.
f4988be7 30
1fa28578
GM
31\f
32* Changes in Emacs 21.1
33
83b6997f
GM
34* When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
35file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
36
d7b38c05 37** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 38added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
39Postscript files are included.
40
41** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
42`dired-ref.tex'.
43
25ad1371
GM
44** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
45expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
46
47This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
48determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
49mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
50interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
51regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
52associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
53
424d8b44 54+++
f0298744
DL
55** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
56displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
57menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
58menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
59
9a8d84ca
DL
60** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
61a version-dependent component.
62
d76c03ea
GM
63** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
64Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
65will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
66character is still bound as before.
67
3b4fa1b2
DL
68** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
69using that menu.
70
40e857ea 71** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 72suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 73
c08398de
DL
74** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
75buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
76contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
77by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
78insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
79the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
80Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
81
3d6cd763
GM
82** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
83coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
84escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
85such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
86recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 87always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 88read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
89(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
90RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 91
0b8a3a6d
DL
92** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
93environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
94
424d8b44 95+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
96** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
97point in a pop-up window.
98
99** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
100displays all characters in that character set.
101
102** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
103coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
104
5cb6a58e
SM
105** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
106on the context.
107
424d8b44 108+++
a1b8d58b
GM
109** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
110
6e417ca5
DL
111** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
112been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
113
424d8b44 114+++
5898e075
DL
115** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
116`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
117indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
118indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
119
424d8b44 120+++
abfcc168
GM
121** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
122sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 123(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
124You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
125
424d8b44 126+++
cc181e95
GM
127** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
128on the display using several methods
129
424d8b44 130+++
cc181e95
GM
131- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
132a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
133be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
134
424d8b44 135+++
cc181e95
GM
136- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
137equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
138
da4496b6 139- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
140
141- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
142the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
143
424d8b44 144+++
3b4fa1b2 145** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 146an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 147command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 148does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 149
424d8b44 150+++
176256a1 151** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
152`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
153typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 154
dd0add8e
DL
155** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
156characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
157
699238d9
GM
158** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
159compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
160this behavior.
161
162The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
163compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
164Emacs dump core.
165
424d8b44 166+++
699238d9 167** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 168
7233c5bd
GM
169*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
170whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
171is useful for debugging X problems.
172
173Example:
174
699238d9 175 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 176
100b3cbb
GM
177*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
178visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
179the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
180and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
181visual class names are
182
183 TrueColor
184 PseudoColor
185 DirectColor
186 StaticColor
187 GrayScale
188 StaticGray
189
190Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
191`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
192meaning.
193
194The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
195supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
196`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
197visual.
198
199Example:
200
699238d9 201 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
202
203*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
204specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
205default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
206resource values are `true' or `on'.
207
208Example:
209
699238d9 210 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 211
0d0c76b8
EZ
212** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
213more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
214now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
215
42088c12 216** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 217display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
218shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
219be customized.
c60ea02e 220
424d8b44 221+++
31047e0d
DL
222** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
223
424d8b44 224+++
b02786f9
GM
225** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
226all frames except the selected one.
227
3261c1d8
DL
228** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
229to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
230
ffe36136 231** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
232the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
233MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
234displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
235
236** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
237MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 238
559cee90
DL
239** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
240read mail from the menu etc.
241
271b4185
GM
242** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
243a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
244
0daee095
GM
245** Changes in Texinfo mode.
246
247** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
248macros
249
250 Key binding Macro
251 -------------------------
252 C-c C-c C-s @strong
253 C-c C-c C-e @emph
254 C-c C-c u @url
255 C-c C-c q @quotation
256 C-c C-c m @email
257
559cee90
DL
258** Changes in Outline mode.
259
260There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
261`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
262the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
263
7a912f63
GM
264** Changes to Emacs Server
265
266*** There new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
267with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
268are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
269Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
270buffers to kill, as before.
271
272Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
273i.e. buffers visited which `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
274this way.
275
956777b3
GM
276** Changes to Show Paren mode.
277
278*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
279The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
280use. Default is 1000.
281
404fa7d6
DL
282** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
283groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
284
424d8b44
DL
285+++
286** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
287M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
288M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
289buffers.
8964fec7 290
424d8b44 291+++
39783d73
WP
292** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
293under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
294.emacs file.
295
296The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
297determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
298
d35fce81
GM
299** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
300abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
301`directory-abbrev-alist'.
302
a933dad1
DL
303** Faces and frame parameters.
304
305There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
306Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
307`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
308`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
309sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
310for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
311parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
312
313Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
314`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 315`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
316`default' face and vice versa.
317
f77a4a8a
GM
318** New face `menu'.
319
320The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
321Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
322attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
323
424d8b44 324+++
a933dad1
DL
325** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
326
327The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
328colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
329correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
330the screen gamma of a frame's display.
331
332PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
333in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
334color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
335
336The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
337`ScreenGamma'.
338
339** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
340
341The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
342Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
343oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
344of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
345the text.
346
347** Emacs has a new face implementation.
348
349The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
350font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
351height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
352These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
353specify a font.
354
355Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
356These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
357under Lisp changes, below.
358
359** New default font is Courier 12pt.
360
424d8b44
DL
361+++
362** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
363of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
364otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
365
366** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
367truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
368foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
369customizing face `fringe'.
370
371** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
372can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
373
374** LessTif support.
375
424d8b44
DL
376Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
377You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
378
379** Toolkit scroll bars.
380
381Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
382LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
383configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
384bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
385bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
386Emacs.
387
388When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
389Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
390Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
391Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
392define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
393`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
394
395Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
396a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
397directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
398different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
399system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
400add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
401
402The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
403`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
404This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
405image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
406Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
407
408** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
409
410When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
411widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
412Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
413
424d8b44 414+++
a933dad1
DL
415** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
416
417When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
418whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
419defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
420highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
421displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
422whitespace.
423
424** Busy-cursor.
425
426Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
427display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
428
424d8b44 429+++
a933dad1
DL
430** Blinking cursor
431
432M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
433terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
434and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
435the group `cursor'.
436
437** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
438
439This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
440generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
441See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
442details.
443
444Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
445have to do anything to activate it.
446
447** Tabs and variable-width text.
448
449Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
450defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
451independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
452Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
453
454** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
455
424d8b44 456+++
a933dad1
DL
457*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
458
459 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
460
79dd1637
RS
461The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
462LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 463
79dd1637
RS
464*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
465LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1
DL
466
467** Hscrolling in C code.
468
cc181e95
GM
469Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
470`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
471customized.
a933dad1
DL
472
473** Tool bar support.
474
475Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
476how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
477
424d8b44 478+++
a933dad1
DL
479** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
480
481Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
482mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
483line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
484about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
485in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
486
487Currently, the following actions have been defined:
488
489- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
490buffers.
491
492- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
493M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
494
495- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
496
424d8b44
DL
497- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
498`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
499
500- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
501
502** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
503
504When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 505from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
506non-nil.
507
508** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
509
510Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
511Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
512the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
513italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
514Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
515attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
516on terminals.
a933dad1
DL
517
518** Sound support
519
2f516940 520Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 521driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 522supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 523
424d8b44 524+++
a933dad1
DL
525** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
526the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
527forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
528value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
529users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
530even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
531
532The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
533
534** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
535
536As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
537drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
538`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
539
540** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
541bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
542
543This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
544`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
545variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
546
547** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
548
549When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
550value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
551number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
552fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
553
554When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
555value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
556number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
557fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
558
559** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
560notably at the end of lines.
561
562All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
563spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
564
424d8b44 565+++
eee54b0e
DL
566There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
567
a933dad1
DL
568** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
569query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
570after each match to get the replacement text.
571
d5483ab1
GM
572** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
573you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 574
424d8b44 575** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
576you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
577lisp-complete-symbol.
578
a933dad1
DL
579** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
580
163ea954
RS
581If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
582longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
583it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
584window size by setting the following variable:
a933dad1
DL
585
586- User option: max-mini-window-height
587
588Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
589fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
590specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
591
592Default is 0.25.
593
2f72fd2f
GM
594** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
595
0d43b60d
GM
596** Changes to hideshow.el
597
598Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
599selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
600
601*** Generalized block selection and traversal
602
603A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
604(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
605which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
606`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
607point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
608(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
609
610If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
611i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
612backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
613the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
614
615*** Isearch support for updating mode line
616
617During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
618blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
619line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
620portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
621is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
622
623To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
624something like this in your .emacs.
625
626 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
627 (lambda ()
628 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
629
559cee90
DL
630** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
631
424d8b44 632+++
559cee90
DL
633If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
634entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
635log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
636
424d8b44 637+++
559cee90 638New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
424d8b44
DL
639buffer.
640
641+++
642New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries in
643a log file.
eb2aac9d
GM
644
645Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
646if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
647
424d8b44
DL
648Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
649version number is performed based on regular expressions from
650`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
651Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 652
3476b54a
GM
653** Changes in Font Lock
654
655*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
656font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
657mode.
658
b3b98592
GM
659** Comint (subshell) changes
660
66b6c480
MB
661By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' to
662distiguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which parts of
663the text were output by the process, and which entered by the user, and
664attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use this information.
665Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, respect field
666boundaries in a fairly natural manner.
667To disable this feature, and use the old behavior, set the variable
668`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' to a non-nil value.
669
b3b98592
GM
670Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
671and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
672
673The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
674buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
675buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
676
677The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
678M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
679the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
680
8c1bec7c
MB
681Packages based on comint.el like shell-mode, and scheme-interaction-mode
682now highlight user input and program prompts, and support choosing
683previous input with mouse-2. To control these feature, see the
684user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 685
e26cec67
GM
686** Changes to Rmail mode
687
c0510d27
GM
688*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
689set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
690receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
691recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
692`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
693as correspondent.
694
695Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
696mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 697regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 698
3b55acc9
GM
699*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
700to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
701Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
702with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
703for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
704
6a1950ec
GM
705*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
706like `j'.
707
5bb6f079
RS
708*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
709specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 710digest message.
e26cec67 711
993d8b7d
DL
712*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
713in which folder to put messages automatically.
714
400a1ed0
GM
715** Changes to TeX mode
716
717The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
718`latex-mode'.
719
a933dad1
DL
720** Changes to RefTeX mode
721
722*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
723 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
724 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
725 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
726 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
727 can be edited from that buffer.
728
729*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
730 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
731 `A' to use all marked entries).
732
733*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
734 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
735
736*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
737 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
738 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
739 been cited.
740
38de9631
GM
741** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
742The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
743semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
744in column 1 are always made leaves.
745
a933dad1
DL
746** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
747has the following new features:
748
749*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
750may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
751to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
752time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
753
754*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
755feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
756file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
757compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
758pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
759defaults to 1.
760
5d94f558 761** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
762file names.
763
424d8b44 764+++
a933dad1
DL
765** Tooltips.
766
767Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
768mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
769can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
770
771Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
772variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
773the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
774tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
775
424d8b44 776+++
a933dad1
DL
777** Customize changes
778
779*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
780`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
781cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
782
783*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
784Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
785default).
786
0ae51efb
GM
787*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
788between custom options. Example:
789
790 (defcustom default-input-method nil
791 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
792 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
793 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
794 :group 'mule
795 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
796 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
797
798This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
799current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
800first in a custom-set-variables statement.
801
a933dad1
DL
802** New features in evaluation commands
803
5e03eb84 804*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
805modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
806print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
807customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
808eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
809
5e03eb84
GM
810*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
811code when called with a prefix argument.
812
ead53494
GM
813** Ispell changes
814
bbe15990
EZ
815*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
816transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
817spell-checks the current buffer.
818
385ff9e3
GM
819*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
820added.
821
822*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
823correction is made and re-checked.
824
74ec6045 825*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
826
827*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
828cases.
829
830*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
831on syntax errors.
832
833*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
834end of the buffer.
835
a933dad1
DL
836** Dired changes
837
838*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
839command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
840is, delete only empty directories.
841
842*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
843command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
844copy directories recursively.
845
f6737cde
GM
846*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
847in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
848the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
849
2f72fd2f
GM
850*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
851replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
852directory.
853
7381ae05
MB
854*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
855a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
856This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
857will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
858accurate or inaccurate as it is.
859
e024b101
GM
860*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
861from ls switches.
862
a933dad1
DL
863** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
864use the -f option when sending mail.
865
b1c609b1
GM
866** CC mode changes.
867
868Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
869current user setups (although it's believed that these
870incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
871However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
872back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
873compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
874release.
875
7972fcfc
GM
876*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
877This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
878of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
879non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
880want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
881have to bother.
882
883Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
884situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 885and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
886If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
887the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
888by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
889
b1c609b1
GM
890*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
891When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
892variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
893take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
894is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
895settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
896possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
897Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
898
899By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
900special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
901the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
902of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
903above.
904
905Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
906when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
907function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
908call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
909then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
910values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
911only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
912function documentation for more info.
913
914The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
915especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
916with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
917intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
918such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
919is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
920configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
921global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
922
923(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
924
925**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
926This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
927
928This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
929variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
930completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
931the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
932empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
933style system.
934
935**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
936In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
937c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
938as far as possible.
939
940*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
941CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
942surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
943chapter about this in the manual.
944
945**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
946The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
947recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
948primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
949adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
950
951**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
952This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
953c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
954
955**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
956This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
957
958It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
959Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
960A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
961inside CC Mode.
962
963Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
964causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
965the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
966available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
967cc-mode/).
968
969**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
970The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
971specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
972literals.
973
974**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
975It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
976prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
977you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
978this function.
979
980*** Fixes to IDL mode.
981It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
982to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
983struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
984Thanks to Eric Eide.
985
986*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
987It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
988opening braces hangs and when they don't.
989
990**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
991
992*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
993See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
994better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
995and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
996
997*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
998previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
999the column specified by comment-column.
1000
1001*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1002In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1003is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1004prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1005contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1006don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1007
1008*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1009instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1010arguments.
1011
1012*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1013
1014*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1015c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1016c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1017variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1018Provan).
1019
1020*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1021
c407c570
GM
1022** Makefile mode changes
1023
1024*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1025
5d94f558 1026*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1027Fontlock mode is active.
1028
87be76f6
GM
1029** Isearch changes
1030
3353ef5a
GM
1031*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1032so that searches can be resumed.
1033
1034*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1035respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1036that started the search.
1037
87be76f6 1038*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1039selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1040
87be76f6
GM
1041*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1042
d35fce81 1043Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1044`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1045search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1046before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1047highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1048`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1049
1050The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1051will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1052Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1053using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1054usual snappy response.
1055
1056If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1057matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1058set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1059isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1060
35384f06
GM
1061** Changes in sort.el
1062
1063The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1064as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
1065new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
1066numeric base.
87be76f6 1067
d7b511c4
GM
1068** Changes to Ange-ftp
1069
424d8b44 1070+++
d7b511c4 1071*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1072names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1073sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1074
d7b511c4
GM
1075*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1076ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1077
9d453139
SS
1078*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1079output ^M at the end of lines.
1080
4b9347b3
GM
1081** Shell script mode changes.
1082
1083Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1084derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1085sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1086
79214ddf
FP
1087** Etags changes.
1088
1089*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1090
aca0be23 1091*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1092possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1093{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1094This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1095a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1096
79214ddf
FP
1097*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1098declarations when given the --declarations option.
1099
1100*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1101"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1102
1103*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1104types.
1105
de370c4c 1106*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1107
1108*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1109
1110*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1111are now tagged.
1112
1113*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1114variables are tagged.
1115
1116*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1117
8dc78b52
FP
1118*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1119for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1120
f6737cde
GM
1121** Changes in etags.el
1122
3f6e4b8b
GM
1123*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1124tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1125is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1126
f6737cde
GM
1127*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1128the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1129
1130If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1131FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1132TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1133obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1134
1135TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1136
1137FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1138List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1139
1140A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1141
1142 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1143 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1144 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1145
1146*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1147of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1148
1149*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1150names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1151
424d8b44 1152+++
fbc164de
PE
1153** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1154and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1155LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1156
0b8a3a6d
DL
1157** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1158Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
11598859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
1160There is currently no specific input method support for them.
59c1bf85 1161
424d8b44 1162+++
163ea954 1163** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1164remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1165appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1166
1167** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1168
424d8b44 1169+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1170** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1171
c0510d27
GM
1172** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
1173containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1174expression from that list, are not checked.
1175
5d94f558
SS
1176** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1177When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1178and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1179the buffer, just like for the local files.
1180
dc28878c
GM
1181** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1182
a933dad1
DL
1183** New modes and packages
1184
ff332647 1185+++
90cbf47e
GM
1186*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1187intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1188typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1189on certain projects.
1190
1191*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1192regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1193
d96d6bb0 1194 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1195
1196will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1197face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1198typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1199Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1200appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1201current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1202corresponding file is read.
1203
424d8b44 1204+++
d96d6bb0 1205*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1206Emacs is idle.
1207
31fc5d15
GM
1208*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1209parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1210
5cb6a58e
SM
1211*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1212package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1213be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1214
424d8b44 1215+++
578979ee
GM
1216*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1217facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1218separate Texinfo file.
1219
424d8b44
DL
1220+++
1221*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1222by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1223provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1224`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1225enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1226
424d8b44 1227+++
6abca616
EZ
1228*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1229without invoking external programs.
1230
1231The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1232and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1233`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1234is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1235Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1236
1237The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1238page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1239
5e5dff44
GM
1240*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1241authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1242
1243The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1244the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1245the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1246Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1247even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1248single step.
1249
1250On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1251matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1252probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1253contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1254
424d8b44 1255+++
f7136ee8
GM
1256*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1257unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1258actually modifying content of a buffer.
1259
bbd9b566
GM
1260*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1261PostScript.
1262
1263Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1264
1265The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1266
1267 ; comment (until end of line)
1268 A non-terminal
1269 "C" terminal
1270 ?C? special
1271 $A default non-terminal
1272 $"C" default terminal
1273 $?C? default special
1274 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1275 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1276 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1277 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1278 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1279 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1280 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1281 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1282 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1283 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1284 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1285 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1286 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1287 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1288 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1289
1290Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1291
99453a38
GM
1292*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1293align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1294determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1295example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1296equal signs of assignments.
1297
424d8b44 1298+++
559cee90
DL
1299*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1300paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1301
424d8b44 1302+++
6448a6b3
GM
1303*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1304list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1305buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1306customize the package.
1307
6344985d
GM
1308*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1309
249652b1
GM
1310*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1311replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1312is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1313and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1314not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1315which answers different needs.
1316
424d8b44 1317+++
3476b54a
GM
1318*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1319suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1320expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1321course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1322reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1323to be enabled.
1324
424d8b44 1325+++
8964fec7
SM
1326*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1327containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1328
424d8b44 1329+++
a933dad1
DL
1330*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1331
424d8b44 1332+++
a933dad1
DL
1333*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1334
1335*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1336
1337*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1338Pascal) language.
1339
1340*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1341the text at point.
1342
1343*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1344
424d8b44 1345+++
8d54eb69
DL
1346*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1347
a933dad1
DL
1348*** whitespace.el ???
1349
ebcfda83
GM
1350*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1351files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1352(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1353interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1354often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1355uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1356codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1357
1358*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1359
1360Here is an example of columns:
1361
1362horse apple bus
1363dog pineapple car EXTRA
1364porcupine strawberry airplane
1365
1366Doing the following settings:
1367
1368 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1369 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1370 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1371 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1372
1373
1374Selecting the lines above and typing:
1375
1376 M-x delimit-columns-region
1377
1378It results:
1379
1380[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1381[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1382[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1383
1384delim-col has the following options:
1385
1386 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1387 before all columns.
1388
1389 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1390 between each column.
1391
1392 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1393 after all columns.
1394
1395 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1396 each column.
1397
1398delim-col has the following commands:
1399
1400 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1401 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1402
424d8b44 1403+++
f507826c 1404*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1405were operated on recently.
1406
1407M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1408
31fc5d15
GM
1409M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1410recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1411
31fc5d15
GM
1412M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1413filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1414file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1415
31fc5d15
GM
1416- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1417- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1418- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1419
31fc5d15
GM
1420The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1421dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1422
8062f458
DL
1423*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1424text.
1425
424d8b44 1426+++
36e24b82 1427*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1428of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1429specific to Message mode.
1430
424d8b44 1431+++
36e24b82
DL
1432*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1433viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1434with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1435
424d8b44 1436+++
aaa659ef
DL
1437*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1438interface to access directory servers using different directory
1439protocols. It has a separate manual.
1440
eee54b0e
DL
1441*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1442for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1443
424d8b44 1444+++
612839b6
GM
1445*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1446
5d94f558 1447*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1448minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1449
399da7e3
DL
1450*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1451with the diary features.
1452
6e417ca5
DL
1453*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1454numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1455
4a27bdfb
GM
1456*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1457Fill mode.
1458
a933dad1
DL
1459** Withdrawn packages
1460
1461*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1462functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1463
3261c1d8
DL
1464*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1465
1466*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1467
1468\f
1469* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1470(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1471
424d8b44
DL
1472+++
1473** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
1474is running in batch mode. For example,
1475
1476 (message "%s" (read t))
1477
1478will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
1479to standard output.
1480
1481+++
1482** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
1483`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
1484
ead53494
GM
1485** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
1486will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
1487frame or window.
1488
27848c01
GM
1489** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
1490were added
1491
1492- Function: remove ELT SEQ
1493
1494Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
1495a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
1496
1497- Function: remq ELT LIST
1498
1499Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
1500comparison is done with `eq'.
1501
1502** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 1503
b548072f
GM
1504** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
1505has been changed.
1506
424d8b44 1507+++
07b14857
KH
1508** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1509without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1510convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1511
9662da0b
GM
1512** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1513or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1514
7fce7efb
DL
1515** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1516function was declared obsolete.
1517
5d94f558 1518** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
1519retained as an alias).
1520
f98d3086
SM
1521** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1522It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1523is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1524
87efd256
GM
1525** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1526
1527- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1528
1529Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1530MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1531
67c9a1d2
GM
1532** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1533
1534- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1535
1536Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1537
1538This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1539calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1540argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1541value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1542returned.
1543
1544Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1545if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1546it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1547minibuffer even if it is active.
1548
1549Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1550counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1551too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1552and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1553`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1554entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1555
1556ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1557ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1558ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1559ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1560ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1561If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1562Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1563
ead53494
GM
1564** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
1565event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
1566argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 1567
25fa6deb
GM
1568** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1569call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1570message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1571Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1572
5d94f558 1573** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1574meaning no limit.
1575
5d94f558 1576** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
1577coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1578DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1579
80c05bd3 1580** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1581of a primitive.
1582
80c05bd3
DL
1583** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1584buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1585This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1586than replacing the local map.
1587
4bc7a543
DL
1588** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1589after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1590
1591** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1592
f0298744
DL
1593** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1594promised long ago.
1595
5d94f558 1596** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
1597\f
1598* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1599
1600Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1601--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1602When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1603so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1604
85c75536
MB
1605*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
1606buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
1607the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
1608restriction to be restored incorrectly.
1609
0b8a3a6d
DL
1610*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1611`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1612when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1613multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1614
1615*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1616`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1617contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1618
1619*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1620changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1621[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1622regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1623the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1624extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1625bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1626eight-bit-graphic.
1627
1628** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1629
1630A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1631a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1632character set as previously.
1633
1634*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1635They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1636modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1637
1638CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1639characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1640range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1641case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1642
1643FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1644name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1645
1646*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1647registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1648"fontset-default".
1649
1650*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1651argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1652
1653** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1654composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1655buffers and strings.
1656
1657*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1658character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1659code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1660have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1661composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1662composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1663The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1664also been deleted.
1665
1666*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1667specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1668`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1669
1670*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1671MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1672composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1673may differ between buffer and string text.
1674
1675*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1676COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1677
1678*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1679directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1680Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1681`composition' from STRING.
1682
1683*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1684a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1685
1686*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1687obsolete.
1688
1689** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1690Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1691character set is not used.
1692
1693** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1694`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1695X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1696
1697+++
1698** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1699are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 17000xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 1701
399da7e3 1702+++
f0124b4a
DL
1703** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1704that offset in the file before writing.
1705
f98d3086
SM
1706** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
1707compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 1708
612839b6
GM
1709** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1710`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1711from which the command was issued.
1712
1713** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1714`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1715`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1716additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1717operate on.
1718
271b4185
GM
1719** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1720to `window-buffer-height'.
1721
1722- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1723
1724Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1725The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1726lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1727
1728Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1729respectively.
1730
1731If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1732COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1733
1734The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1735obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1736on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1737
1738Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1739buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1740possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1741is currently displayed in some window.
1742
3c30cb6e
DL
1743** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1744argument function's results.
1745
62f20204
GM
1746** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1747signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1748
c0510d27
GM
1749** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1750header is the list of headers passed to it.
1751
1752** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1753ignores differences in case and text representation.
1754
1755** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1756cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1757as follows:
1758
1759 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1760 nil don't display a cursor
1761 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1762 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1763 others display a box cursor.
1764
9a0dd3dc
GM
1765** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1766an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1767defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1768set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1769
d7b511c4 1770** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1771specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1772the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1773text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1774
1775Example:
1776
1777 (string-to-syntax "()")
1778 => (4 . 41)
1779
1fa28578
GM
1780** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1781other than 10.
1782
1783*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1784INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1785
5d94f558 1786 #b1111
1fa28578 1787 => 15
5d94f558 1788 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
1789 => -15
1790
1791*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1792
5d94f558 1793 #o666
1fa28578
GM
1794 => 438
1795
1796*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1797
5d94f558 1798 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
1799 => 48815
1800
1801*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1802
5d94f558 1803 #2R-111
1fa28578 1804 => -7
5d94f558 1805 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
1806 => 267
1807
3d4ff2dd 1808** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 1809the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
1810and isn't a string.
1811
3d4ff2dd
GM
1812** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1813a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1814value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1815not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1816
16ce590d
DL
1817+++
1818** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1819
73825616 1820** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1821for a regexp in a string.
1822
1823** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1824`mouse-position-function'.
1825
723e779c
GM
1826** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1827that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1828
d1e103b2
GM
1829** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1830Keywords are now always considered constants.
1831
31047e0d
DL
1832+++
1833** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1834returns it.
1835
7a85e4df
GM
1836** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1837returned by function `recent-keys'.
1838
02b14400
RS
1839+++
1840** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1841can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1842Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1843etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1844mode.
404fa7d6 1845
02b14400 1846+++
8964fec7
SM
1847** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1848and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1849
02b14400
RS
1850+++
1851** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1852has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1853function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1854returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1855been performed."
1856
1857When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1858and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1859hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1860then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1861
02b14400 1862+++
81da8b32
GM
1863** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1864In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1865and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1866
02b14400 1867+++
9e207b90
GM
1868** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1869with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1870specified table.
1871
1872 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1873
1874Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1875TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1876saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1877what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1878
02b14400 1879+++
d7f89643 1880** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1881Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1882
02b14400 1883+++
dde9e75a
GM
1884** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1885removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1886
02b14400 1887+++
9da30515
GM
1888** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1889instead of being optional.
1890
02b14400 1891+++
d20679eb
GM
1892** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1893modify read-only text.
1894
02b14400 1895+++
fbc164de
PE
1896** New functions and variables for locales.
1897
1898The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1899decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1900time functions like strftime. The new variables
1901`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1902locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1903
1904The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1905environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1906the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1907environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1908not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1909`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1910`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1911
02b14400 1912+++
863476d1
SM
1913** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1914To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1915modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1916start sequences.
1917
02b14400 1918+++
ef6d912c
GM
1919** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1920because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1921
02b14400 1922+++
a933dad1
DL
1923** New function `propertize'
1924
1925The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1926strings with text properties.
1927
1928- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1929
1930Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1931by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1932PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1933specified value of that property. Example:
1934
1935 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1936
1937+++
1938** push and pop macros.
1939
02b14400
RS
1940Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1941are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1942as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1943
1944(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1945(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1946 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1947
02b14400
RS
1948** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1949
6c7fd5aa
RS
1950Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1951are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1952
1953(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1954 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1955 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1956 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1957
1958(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1959 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1960 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1961 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1962
a933dad1
DL
1963+++
1964** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1965as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1966
1967[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1968[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1969[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1970[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1971[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1972 space, and DEL.
1973[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1974 and DEL.
1975[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1976 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1977 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1978[:alpha:] matches letters.
1979 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1980 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1981[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1982[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1983[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1984[:punct:] matches punctuation.
1985 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1986 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
1987[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
1988[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
1989[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
1990
1991+++
1992** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
1993
1994The following functions are defined for hash tables:
1995
1996- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
1997
1998The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
1999are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2000
2001:test TEST
2002
2003TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2004Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2005it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2006
2007:size SIZE
2008
2009SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2010many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2011
2012:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2013
2014REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2015full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2016size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
20171.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2018old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2019
2020:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2021
2022THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2023hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2024(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2025
2026:weakness WEAK
2027
b548072f
GM
2028WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2029`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2030`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2031collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2032outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2033
2034- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2035
2036Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2037
2038- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2039
2040Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2041
2042- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2043
2044Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2045values are shared.
2046
2047- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2048
2049Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2050
2051- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2052
2053Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2054
2055- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2056
2057Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2058
2059- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2060
2061Returns the size of TABLE.
2062
d96d6bb0 2063- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2064
2065Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2066
2067- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2068
2069Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2070
2071- Function: clrhash TABLE
2072
2073Clear TABLE.
2074
2075- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2076
2077Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2078not found.
2079
79214ddf 2080- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2081
2082Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2083another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2084
2085- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2086
2087Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2088
2089- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2090
2091Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2092arguments KEY and VALUE.
2093
2094- Function: sxhash OBJ
2095
2096Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2097
2098- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2099
2100Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2101a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2102comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2103and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2104of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2105
2106TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2107
2108HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2109code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2110integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2111
2112Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2113be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2114
2115 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2116 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2117
2118 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2119 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2120
79214ddf 2121 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2122 'case-fold-string-hash))
2123
2124 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2125
2126+++
2127** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2128
2129It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2130circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2131a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2132
2133+++
2134** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2135
2136If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2137#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2138
a933dad1
DL
2139+++
2140** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2141t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2142specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2143is too short to reach that column.
2144
2145+++
2146** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2147now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2148after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2149two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2150
2151If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2152perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2153and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2154
2155+++
2156** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2157to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2158
2159+++
2160** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2161calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2162
2163+++
2164** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2165directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2166small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2167small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2168temporary-file-directory instead.
2169
2170+++
2171** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2172the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2173`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2174hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2175
2176+++
2177** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2178elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2179
2180+++
2181** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2182
2183make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2184creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2185ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2186
2187+++
2188** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2189
2190The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2191on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2192is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2193never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2194ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2195overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2196
2197If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2198that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2199to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2200The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2201
2202+++
2203** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2204
2205Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2206If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2207ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2208result string.
2209
2210Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2211string where arguments appear in the result string.
2212
2213Example:
2214
2215 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2216 (s2 "world"))
2217 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2218 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2219 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2220
2221results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2222
2223+++
2224** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2225
2226Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2227The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2228argument in it.
2229
2230 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2231 (arg "world"))
2232 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2233 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2234 (message msg arg))
2235
2236+++
2237** Sound support
2238
2239Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2240(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2241
2242Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2243(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2244to enable sound support.
2245
2246Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2247list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2248when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2249functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2250sound to play, before playing the sound.
2251
2252The following sound properties are supported:
2253
2254- `:file FILE'
2255
2256FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2257searched relative to `data-directory'.
2258
6fb40beb
GM
2259- `:data DATA'
2260
2261DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2262may be present, but not both.
2263
a933dad1
DL
2264- `:volume VOLUME'
2265
2266VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
22670..1. This property is optional.
2268
2269Other properties are ignored.
2270
2271** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2272
2273** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2274a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2275
2276** Changes to garbage collection
2277
2278*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2279of live and free strings.
2280
2281*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2282strings that have been consed so far.
2283
a933dad1 2284\f
04545643
GM
2285* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2286Lisp Manual
2287
9a8d84ca
DL
2288+++
2289** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2290
2291** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2292image.
2293
2294- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2295
2296Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2297
2298SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2299measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2300character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2301font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2302FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2303
0b8a3a6d
DL
2304** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2305satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2306
2307+++
2308** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2309optional.
2310
04545643
GM
2311** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center'.
2312
2313When this property is specified, the image is vertically centered
2314around a centerline which would be the vertical center of text drawn
2315at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
2316properties and overlays that apply to the image.
2317
2318\f
a933dad1
DL
2319* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2320
2321Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2322--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2323When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2324so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2325
f6d3257b
GM
2326** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2327to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2328
2329Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2330text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2331is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2332your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2333laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2334just display it black instead.
2335
2336This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2337a line like
2338
2339 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2340
2341in your `.emacs'.
2342
a933dad1
DL
2343** New face implementation.
2344
2345Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2346font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2347
2348+++
2349*** New faces.
2350
2351Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2352
2353 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2354
a933dad1
DL
2355 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2356 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2357
a933dad1 2358 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2359
a933dad1 2360 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2361
a933dad1 2362 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2363
a933dad1 2364 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2365
a933dad1
DL
2366 7. Background color.
2367
2368 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2369
2370 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2371
2372 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2373
2374 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2375
2376 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2377 color.
2378
2379 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2380 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2381
2382Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2383same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2384frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2385faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2386with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2387attributes mentioned above.
2388
2389There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2390definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2391created frames.
79214ddf 2392
a933dad1
DL
2393A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2394have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2395`fully-specified'.
2396
2397+++
2398*** Face merging.
2399
2400The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2401combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2402aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2403properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2404that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2405results in a fully-specified face.
2406
2407+++
2408*** Face realization.
2409
2410After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2411merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2412realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2413available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2414face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2415cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2416
2417Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2418character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2419for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2420charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2421
2422Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2423specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2424being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2425the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2426statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2427
2428In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2429`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
24300x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2431the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2432initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2433Emacs.
2434
2435Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2436`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2437registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2438with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2439
2440++++
2441**** Clearing face caches.
2442
2443The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2444on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2445unused fonts.
2446
2447+++
2448*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2449
a933dad1
DL
2450Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2451given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2452for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2453
2454If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2455pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2456family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2457property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2458an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2459
2460Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2461against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2462match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2463
2464Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2465
2466The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2467attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2468face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2469names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2470that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2471width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2472to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2473
2474Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2475specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2476face doesn't exist.
2477
2478+++
2479**** Scalable fonts
2480
2481Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2482since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2483servers.
2484
2485To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2486`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2487scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2488Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2489scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2490that list. Example:
2491
2492 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2493
2494allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2495
2496+++
2497*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2498
2499- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2500
2501Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2502is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2503string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2504
2505If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2506the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2507FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2508POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2509SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2510These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2511if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2512REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2513the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2514of the face font sort order.
2515
79214ddf 2516- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2517
2518Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2519omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2520(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2521non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2522
2523- Variable: font-list-limit
2524
2525Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2526won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2527matching font. The default is currently 100.
2528
2529+++
2530*** Setting face attributes.
2531
2532For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2533with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2534implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2535`face-attribute'.
2536
2537Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2538symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2539
2540The following attributes are recognized:
2541
2542`:family'
2543
2544VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2545or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2546and `?' are allowed.
2547
2548`:width'
2549
2550VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2551It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2552`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2553`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2554
2555`:height'
2556
2557VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
25581/10 pt.
2559
2560`:weight'
2561
2562VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2563symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2564`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2565
2566`:slant'
2567
2568VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2569symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2570`reverse-oblique'.
2571
2572`:foreground', `:background'
2573
2574VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2575
2576`:underline'
2577
2578VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2579VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2580a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2581don't underline.
2582
2583`:overline'
2584
2585VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2586VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2587string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2588overline.
2589
2590`:strike-through'
2591
2592VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2593striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2594face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2595is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2596
2597`:box'
2598
2599VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2600around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2601VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2602of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2603and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2604VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2605:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2606the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2607specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2608defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2609the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2610color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2611should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2612like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2613that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2614the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2615box.
2616
2617`:inverse-video'
2618
2619VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2620inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2621
2622`:stipple'
2623
2624If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2625The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2626searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2627HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2628is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2629explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2630
2631For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2632and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2633
2634`:font'
2635
2636Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2637XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2638is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2639versions of Emacs.
2640
2641For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2642be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2643must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2644
2645Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2646`defface'.
2647
2648*** Face attributes and X resources
2649
2650The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2651from X resources:
2652
2653 Face attribute X resource class
2654-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2655 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2656 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2657 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2658 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2659 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2660 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2661 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2662 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2663 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2664 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2665 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2666 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2667 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2668 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2669 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2670 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2671 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2672 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2673 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2674
2675+++
2676*** Text property `face'.
2677
2678The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2679specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2680specification can be
2681
26821. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2683
26842. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2685 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2686 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2687 for face attribute names.
2688
26893. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2690 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2691 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2692
2693+++
2694** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2695
acf3ecb7
EZ
2696The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2697on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2698the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2699default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2700`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2701used to clear the mapping table.
2702
acf3ecb7
EZ
2703** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2704
2705The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2706and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2707type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2708color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2709display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2710old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2711`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2712compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2713should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2714modify their color-related behavior.
2715
2716The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2717any frame type.
2718
8a5719f0
EZ
2719** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2720
2721The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2722`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2723`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2724`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2725`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2726`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2727display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2728the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2729platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2730
a933dad1
DL
2731+++
2732** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2733
463cac2d 2734This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2735
2736The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2737end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2738Otherwise, it returns zero.
2739
463cac2d
GM
2740** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2741
2742There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2743buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 2744property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 2745
9a9dfda8 2746Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2747forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2748to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2749not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2750commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2751boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2752`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2753functions.
463cac2d
GM
2754
2755Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2756a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2757editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2758
9a9dfda8
GM
2759The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2760
59927f88 2761- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
2762
2763Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 2764
9a9dfda8
GM
2765A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2766If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2767constrained position if that is is different.
2768
2769If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2770positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2771ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 2772constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
2773as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2774is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
2775fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
2776the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
2777also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
2778
2779If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2780NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2781unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2782C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2783only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2784
59927f88
MB
2785If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
2786a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
2787
2788Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
2789
2790- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 2791
59927f88 2792Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 2793A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2794If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
2795
2796- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2797
2798Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2799A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
2800If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
2801If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
2802field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2803
2804- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2805
2806Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2807A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
2808If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
2809If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
2810then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2811
2812- Function: field-string &optional POS
2813
2814Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2815A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2816If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
2817
2818- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2819
2820Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2821A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2822If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 2823
a933dad1
DL
2824+++
2825** Image support.
2826
2827Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2828strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2829(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2830replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2831
2832If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2833`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2834AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2835window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2836area.
2837
2838IMAGE is an image specification.
2839
2840*** Image specifications
2841
2842Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2843is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2844specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2845symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2846described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2847
2848The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2849
2850`:ascent ASCENT'
2851
576da55d
GM
2852ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
2853If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 2854to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
2855
2856If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
2857image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
2858
5d94f558 2859If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
2860centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
2861of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
2862overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
2863
2864`:margin MARGIN'
2865
79214ddf 2866MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2867margin around the image. Default is 0.
2868
2869`:relief RELIEF'
2870
2871RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2872around an image.
2873
2874`:algorithm ALGO'
2875
2876Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2877be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2878supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2879which is intended to display images "disabled."
2880
2881`:heuristic-mask BG'
2882
2883If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2884background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2885determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2886corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2887the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2888be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2889background of the image.
2890
2891`:file FILE'
2892
2893Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2894search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2895building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2896may be present in the image specification.
2897
518df5c4
GM
2898`:data DATA'
2899
2900Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2901supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2902present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2903support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2904
a933dad1
DL
2905*** Supported image types
2906
b246b1f6 2907**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2908
2909XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2910properties supported are
2911
2912`:foreground FG'
2913
2914FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2915is the frame's foreground.
2916
2917`:background FG'
2918
2919BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2920the frame's background color.
2921
2922XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2923case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2924instead of a `:file' property.
2925
2926`:width WIDTH'
2927
2928WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2929
2930`:height HEIGHT'
2931
2932HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2933
2934`:data DATA'
2935
2936DATA must be either
2937
2938 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2939 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2940
2941 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2942
2943 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2944 bitmap.
2945
c76e04a8
GM
2946 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2947 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2948 in the file.
2949
a933dad1
DL
2950**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2951
2952XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2953`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2954found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2955`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2956
2957Additional image properties supported are:
2958
2959`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2960
2961SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2962name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2963name.
2964
2965XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2966add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2967
a933dad1
DL
2968The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2969to display compressed images.
2970
2971**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2972
2973PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2974mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2975defined.
2976
2977**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2978
2979Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2980package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2981are:
2982
a933dad1
DL
2983**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2984
2985Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2986package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2987properties defined.
2988
2989**** GIF, image type `gif'
2990
2991Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
2992`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
2993
2994Additional image properties supported are:
2995
2996`:index INDEX'
2997
2998INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
2999multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3000
3001This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3002For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3003at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3004every 0.1 seconds.
3005
3006(defun show-anim (file max)
3007 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3008 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3009
3010(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3011 (when (= idx max)
3012 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3013 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3014 (save-excursion
3015 (set-buffer buffer)
3016 (goto-char (point-min))
3017 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3018 (insert-image img "x"))
3019 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3020
3021**** PNG, image type `png'
3022
3023Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3024package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3025properties defined.
3026
3027**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3028
3029Additional image properties supported are:
3030
3031`:pt-width WIDTH'
3032
3033WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3034integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3035
3036`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3037
3038HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3039must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3040
3041`:bounding-box BOX'
3042
3043BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3044the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3045files. This is an required property.
3046
3047Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3048lisp/gs.el.
3049
3050*** Lisp interface.
3051
79214ddf
FP
3052The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3053which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3054
3055Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3056they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3057The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3058manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3059images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3060
3061*** Simplified image API, image.el
3062
3063The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3064creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3065can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3066define an image based on available image types. The functions
3067`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3068buffer.
3069
3070+++
3071** Display margins.
3072
3073Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3074and images.
3075
3076To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3077`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3078`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3079obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3080`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3081the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3082of the display margins.
3083
3084You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3085containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3086one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3087string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3088in this file).
3089
3090+++
3091** Help display
3092
3093Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3094moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3095`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3096that have a `help-echo' property.
3097
9662da0b 3098If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3099is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3100the window in which the help was found.
3101
3102If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3103`help-echo' text property was found.
3104
3105If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3106POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3107
3108If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3109the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3110mouse.
d5aa31d8 3111
9662da0b
GM
3112If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3113string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3114
3115For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3116determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3117property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3118For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3119used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3120
3121The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3122the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3123causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3124
3125+++
3126** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3127
3128The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3129This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3130
3131The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3132scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3133The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3134scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3135used.
3136
79214ddf
FP
3137 (global-set-key [A-down]
3138 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3139 (interactive)
79214ddf 3140 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3141 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3142 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3143 #'(lambda ()
3144 (interactive)
79214ddf 3145 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3146 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3147
3148+++
3149** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3150
3151Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3152when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3153variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3154is called with one argument, POS.
3155
3156At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3157characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3158as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3159property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3160`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3161
3162+++
3163** Tool bar support.
3164
3165Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3166parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3167controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3168suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3169`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3170automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3171
3172*** Tool bar item definitions
3173
3174Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3175`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3176where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3177
a933dad1
DL
3178CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3179evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3180the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3181property (see below).
79214ddf 3182
a933dad1
DL
3183BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3184binding are currently ignored.
3185
3186The following properties are recognized:
3187
3188`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3189
a933dad1
DL
3190FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3191or disabled.
79214ddf 3192
a933dad1 3193`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3194
a933dad1 3195FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3196
a933dad1
DL
3197`:filter FUNCTION'
3198
3199FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3200FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3201used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3202
a933dad1
DL
3203`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3204
3205TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3206and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3207
a933dad1
DL
3208`:image IMAGES'
3209
3210IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3211image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3212meaning of each of the four elements:
3213
3214 Index Use when item is
3215 ----------------------------------------
3216 0 enabled and selected
3217 1 enabled and deselected
3218 2 disabled and selected
3219 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3220
4ba7246d
GM
3221If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3222algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3223
a933dad1 3224`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3225
a933dad1
DL
3226Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3227is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3228
3229*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3230
3231If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3232resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3233than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3234
79214ddf 3235If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3236raised when the mouse moves over them.
3237
3238You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3239`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3240pixels. Default is 1.
3241
3242You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3243`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3244
3245*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3246
3247You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3248a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3249
3250 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3251 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3252 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3253
3254is the original tool bar item definition, then
3255
3256 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3257
3258makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3259item.
3260
3261** Mode line changes.
3262
3263+++
3264*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3265
3266The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3267that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3268a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3269
32701. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3271a `local-map' text property.
3272
32732. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3274that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3275
32763. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3277is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3278`local-map' property.
3279
3280The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3281properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3282example.
3283
54522c9f
GM
3284*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3285evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3286
a933dad1
DL
3287+++
3288*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3289variable mode-line-format to nil.
3290
3291+++
3292*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3293
3294This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3295`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3296completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3297`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3298line.
3299
3300The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3301`header-line'.
3302
3303The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3304position in the header-line.
3305
3306+++
3307** Text property `display'
3308
3309The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
3310also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
3311`display' property should be a display specification, as described
3312below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3313
3314*** Variable width and height spaces
3315
3316To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3317specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3318`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3319area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3320marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3321displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3322simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3323
3324The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3325PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3326properties described below.
3327
3328The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3329characters having the `display' property.
3330
3331- :width WIDTH
3332
3333Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3334character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3335
3336- :relative-width FACTOR
3337
3338Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3339first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3340same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3341width of that character by FACTOR.
3342
3343- :align-to HPOS
3344
3345Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3346value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3347
3348Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3349
3350- :height HEIGHT
3351
3352Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3353normal line height.
3354
3355- :relative-height FACTOR
3356
3357The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3358of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3359
3360- :ascent ASCENT
3361
3362Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3363used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3364baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3365equal to 100.
3366
3367You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3368
3369*** Images
3370
3371A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3372. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3373in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3374their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3375the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3376`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3377area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3378the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3379as display specification.
3380
3381*** Other display properties
3382
3383- :space-width FACTOR
3384
3385Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3386should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3387integer or float.
3388
3389- :height HEIGHT
3390
3391Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3392
3393If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3394means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3395the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3396``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3397a font is available counts as a step.
3398
3399If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3400as tall as the frame's default font.
3401
3402If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3403height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3404
3405Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3406`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3407
3408- :raise FACTOR
3409
3410FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3411font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3412raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3413amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3414`:height' subproperty.
3415
3416*** Conditional display properties
3417
3418All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3419has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3420applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3421During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3422the text having the `display' property.
3423
3424The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3425`(:when t SPEC)'.
3426
3427+++
3428** New menu separator types.
3429
3430Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3431item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3432treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3433to specify other menu separator types.
3434
3435- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3436
3437No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3438separator occurs.
3439
3440- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3441
3442A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3443
3444- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3445
3446A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3447
3448- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3449
3450A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3451
3452- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3453
3454A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3455
3456- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3457
3458A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3459displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3460
3461- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3462
3463A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3464
3465- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3466
3467A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3468
3469- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3470
3471A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3472
3473- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3474
3475Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3476
3477- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3478
3479Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3480
3481- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3482
3483Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3484
3485- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3486
3487Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3488
3489Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3490the corresponding single-line separators.
3491
3492+++
3493** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3494
3495The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3496`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3497Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3498that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3499default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3500default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3501default foreground is black.
3502
3503The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3504(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3505`ScrollBarBackground').
3506
3507Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3508settings for scroll bar colors.
3509
3510+++
3511** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3512display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3513
3514---
3515** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3516starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3517on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3518line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3519the original window start.
3520
3521---
3522** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3523`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3524now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3525
3526+++
3527** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3528
3529A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3530`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3531windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3532other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3533
3534The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3535fixed-width and fixed-height.
3536
3537 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3538
3539A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3540fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3541window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3542change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3543temporarily to nil, for example
3544
3545 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3546 (enlarge-window 10))
3547
79214ddf 3548Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3549or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3550
3551** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3552terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3553to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3554overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3555horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3556support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 3557
3787e12e
GM
3558
3559^L
3560* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3561
3562** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3563input.
3564
3565** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3566
3567** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3568
3569** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3570only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3571exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3572(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3573(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3574
3575** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3576been added.
3577
3578^L
3579* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3580
3581** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3582
3583^L
3584* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3585
3586** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3587M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
3588\f
3589* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3590
3591** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3592
3593You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3594Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3595`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3596
3597If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3598is the one that is used.
3599
3600** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3601the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3602Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3603separate from the command's regular output.
3604Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3605says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3606In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3607the buffer name.
3608
3609When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3610output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3611it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3612cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3613
3614** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3615the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3616is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3617created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3618
3619** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3620example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3621match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3622quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3623
3624** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3625now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3626if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3627they never ignore case.
3628
3629** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3630under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3631applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3632of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3633just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3634convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3635part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3636
3637If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3638the same format that was used in the file before.
3639
3640You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3641`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3642
3643** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3644renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3645This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3646
3647** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3648The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3649buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3650your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3651is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3652end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3653Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3654
3655The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3656eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3657control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3658format. You can now customize these variables.
3659
3660** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3661filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3662filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3663enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3664
3665** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3666in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3667windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3668
3669** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3670dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3671doesn't have any effect.
3672
3673** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3674not one per buffer.
3675
3676** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3677use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3678 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3679
3680** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3681To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3682`auto-show-mode' command.
3683
3684** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3685avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3686versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3687choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3688occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3689
3690** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3691cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3692
3693** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3694character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3695feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3696
3697** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3698the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3699interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3700and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3701
3702** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3703
3704The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3705that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3706one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3707codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3708set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3709
3710Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3711from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3712
3713IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3714equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3715a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3716`?' on other systems.
3717
3718IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3719feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3720Unix.
3721
3722Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3723current codepage when it starts.
3724
3725** Mail changes
3726
3727*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3728`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3729appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3730non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3731MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3732headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3733latin-1:
3734
3735 MIME-version: 1.0
3736 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3737 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3738
3739*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3740default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3741default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3742sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3743buffer-file-coding-system.
3744
3745You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3746sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3747mail.
3748
3749*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3750if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3751Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3752list of possible coding systems.
3753
3754** CC Mode changes
3755
3756*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3757modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3758longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3759docstring for details.
3760
3761*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3762symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3763found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3764prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3765lineup functions use this feature currently.
3766
3767*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3768"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3769
3770*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3771"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3772
3773*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3774from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3775symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3776c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3777anonymous classes.
3778
3779*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3780syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3781
3782*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3783inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3784support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3785function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3786
3787*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3788(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3789brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3790c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3791(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3792
3793*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3794
3795*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3796
3797*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3798for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3799
3800*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3801
3802*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3803associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3804This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3805circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3806class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3807
3808** Gnus changes.
3809
3810*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3811added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3812Gnus manual for the full story.
3813
3814*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3815before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3816group, which is created automatically.
3817
3818*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3819values.
3820
3821*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3822
3823*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3824outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3825
3826*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3827`C-u C-c C-c'.
3828
3829*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3830
3831*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3832re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3833
3834*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3835
3836*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3837Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3838
3839*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3840`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3841
3842*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3843control over simplification.
3844
3845*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3846
3847*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3848limit.
3849
3850*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3851
3852*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3853
3854*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
3855If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3856rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3857
3858*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3859`a' forces normal posting method.
3860
3861*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3862-- `W d'.
3863
3864*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3865to a non-nil value.
3866
3867*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3868where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3869
3870*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3871has been added.
3872
3873*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3874
3875*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3876
3877*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3878`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3879
3880*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3881`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3882
3883*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3884
3885*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3886been added.
3887
3888*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3889`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3890
3891*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3892updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3893
3894*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3895
3896*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3897
3898*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3899
3900** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3901
3902*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3903options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3904nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3905
3906*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3907TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3908of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3909TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3910can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3911
3912*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3913All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3914but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3915the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3916
3917*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3918the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3919buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3920mismatch.
3921
3922** Changes to RefTeX mode
3923
3924*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3925file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3926
3927*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3928lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3929characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3930removed from the label.
3931
3932*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3933a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3934
3935*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3936customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3937
3938*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3939`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
3940expressions.
3941
3942*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3943
3944** New/deleted modes and packages
3945
3946*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3947SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3948
3949*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3950editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3951SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3952
3953*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3954changes with a special face.
3955
3956*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3957this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3958Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3959\f
3960* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3961
3962** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3963This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3964conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3965and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3966check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3967
3968The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3969Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3970distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3971
3972** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3973MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3974controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3975directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3976Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3977on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3978string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3979program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3980printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3981
3982** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3983output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3984available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3985input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3986temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
3987program.
3988
3989An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
3990and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
3991programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
3992automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
3993as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
3994ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
3995
3996** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
3997a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
3998MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
3999was not documented clearly before.
4000
4001** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4002This includes Tetris and Snake.
4003\f
4004* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4005
4006** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4007return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4008They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4009meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4010
4011** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4012WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4013and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4014
4015** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4016
4017*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4018It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4019
4020*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4021the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4022integers.
4023
4024** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4025files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4026arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4027file names and attributes are returned.
4028
4029** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4030sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4031accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4032It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4033returns the result.
4034
4035** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4036to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4037
4038** New functions for base64 conversion:
4039
4040The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4041into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4042performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4043optionally.
4044
4045Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4046job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4047
4048**
4049The new function process-running-child-p
4050will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4051terminal to its own child process.
4052
4053** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4054when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4055to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4056itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4057
4058** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4059be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4060
4061** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4062:included is an alias for :visible.
4063
4064easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4065easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4066to move or copy menu entries.
4067
4068** Multibyte editing changes
4069
4070*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4071an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4072make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4073work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4074char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4075 (setq char (sref str idx)
4076 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4077The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4078
4079If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4080(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4081 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4082
4083*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4084region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4085deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4086
4087 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4088
4089This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4090across the boundary.
4091
4092*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4093`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4094 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4095 contains 8-bit characters.
4096 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4097 contains invalid characters.
4098
4099*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4100text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4101preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4102text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4103way.
4104
4105*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4106If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4107end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4108prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4109
4110*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4111compose Thai characters in a string.
4112
4113** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4114argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4115for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4116menus should always use the third argument.
4117
4118** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4119read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4120arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4121input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4122
4123** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4124of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4125programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4126inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4127
4128** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4129the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4130returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4131echo area contents.
4132
4133 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4134
4135** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4136NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4137requested feature cannot be loaded.
4138
4139** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4140foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4141means to clear out that attribute.
4142
4143** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4144gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4145
4146** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4147read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4148unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4149end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4150
4151** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4152the gap of the current buffer.
4153
4154** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4155to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4156current buffer.
4157
4158** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4159facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4160These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4161it back in after any modifications have been made.
4162\f
4163* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4164
4165** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4166the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4167/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4168directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4169subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4170
4171Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4172names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4173Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4174which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4175these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4176
4177Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4178starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4179time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4180
4181This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4182Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4183to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4184subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4185`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4186results.
4187
4188** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4189GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4190that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4191fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4192\f
4193* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4194
4195** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4196including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4197it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4198perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4199
4200** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4201specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4202region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4203further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4204command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4205within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4206are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4207region.
4208
4209In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4210selective undo.
4211
4212** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4213unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4214buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4215effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4216Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4217
4218The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4219though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4220-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4221load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4222
4223** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4224no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4225enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4226something that most users not do.
4227
4228** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4229operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4230The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4231applications.
4232
4233C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4234pasting operations.
4235
4236** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4237setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4238like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4239printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4240`ps-printer-name'.
4241
4242** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4243minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4244any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4245except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4246incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4247hits a new word.
4248
4249Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4250Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4251to be confused by TeX commands.
4252
4253You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4254correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4255clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4256of various alternative replacements and actions.
4257
4258Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4259the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4260corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4261alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4262flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4263
4264Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4265flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4266
4267** Changes in input method usage.
4268
4269Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4270the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4271respectively.
4272
4273You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4274
4275If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4276of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4277
4278The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4279that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4280
4281 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4282
4283 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4284
4285 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4286 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4287
4288 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4289 given in the following case:
4290 o When you are using a complex input method.
4291 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4292
4293If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4294input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4295and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4296setting it to t is helpful.
4297
4298The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4299
4300In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4301keys:
4302 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4303 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4304 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4305These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4306environment.
4307
4308** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4309names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4310minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4311get
4312
4313 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4314
4315which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4316
4317Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4318Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4319
4320** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4321at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4322its owner and group.
4323
4324** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4325Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4326
4327** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4328contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4329
4330** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4331which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4332in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4333by the left edge of the rectangle.
4334
4335** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4336increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4337C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4338for writing keyboard macros.
4339
4340** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4341files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4342frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4343the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4344additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4345info.
4346
4347** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4348
4349** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4350query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4351contents only.
4352
4353** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4354confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4355the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4356says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4357
4358** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4359non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4360literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4361
4362** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4363now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4364Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4365inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4366
4367** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4368failure if the command produces no output.
4369
4370** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4371manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4372the mouse.
4373
4374** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4375mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4376function and variable names.
4377
4378** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4379reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4380file-coding-system-alist.
4381
4382** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4383t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4384converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4385the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4386according to the current fontset.
4387
4388** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4389
4390The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4391that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4392nonascii-insert-offset.
4393
4394For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4395enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4396nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4397characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4398
4399** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4400an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4401
4402** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4403letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4404
4405** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4406are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4407command keys.
4408
4409** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4410user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4411
4412Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4413user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4414all variables that have documentation.
4415
4416** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4417shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4418that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4419minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4420it should show; the default is 20.
4421
4422Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4423the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4424of your input.
4425
4426** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4427all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4428recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4429argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4430the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4431Newly added options are included as well.
4432
4433If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4434then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4435for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4436
4437This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4438Customize menu.
4439
4440** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4441the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4442
4443** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4444buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4445invoked.
4446
4447** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4448that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4449The default is 1.
4450
4451** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4452syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4453new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4454(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4455sensibly.
4456
4457** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4458
4459** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4460value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4461two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4462
4463** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4464reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4465for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4466every night.
4467
4468** Desktop changes
4469
4470*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
4471the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4472
4473*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4474and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4475
4476** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4477read and post multi-lingual articles.
4478
4479** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4480doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4481be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4482outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4483the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
4484made invisible again.
4485
4486** Mail reading and sending changes
4487
4488*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4489the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4490changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4491toggle.
4492
4493*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4494now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4495summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4496the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4497rmail-default-body-file.
4498
4499*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4500longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4501handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4502
4503*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4504it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4505is evaluated to insert the signature.
4506
4507*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4508outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4509handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4510putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4511transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4512especially interested in trying feedmail.
4513
4514feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4515feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4516provided by feedmail are:
4517
4518**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4519stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4520there is also a queue for draft messages
4521
4522**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4523be prompted for confirmation
4524
4525**** does smart filling of address headers
4526
4527**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4528the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4529can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4530
4531**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4532the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4533/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4534function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4535
4536** Dired changes
4537
4538*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4539files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4540
4541*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4542run Dired on the directory name at point.
4543
4544*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4545files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4546for a specified regexp.
4547
4548** VC Changes
4549
4550*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4551conveniently.
4552
4553*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4554faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4555Dired.
4556
4557VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4558directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4559listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4560currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4561
4562You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4563then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4564vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4565control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4566on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4567
4568All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4569is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4570`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4571the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4572`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4573
4574The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4575toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
4576VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
4577`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4578
4579Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4580ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4581command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4582
4583*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4584file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4585session to resolve them.
4586
4587Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4588resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4589contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4590uses as well).
4591
4592*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4593command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4594you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4595either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4596branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4597If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4598using ediff.
4599
4600** Changes in Font Lock
4601
4602*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4603are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4604use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4605unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4606compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4607
4608** Frame name display changes
4609
4610*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4611frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4612raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4613when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4614
4615*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4616frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4617menu.
4618
4619** Comint (subshell) changes
4620
4621*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4622subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4623with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4624
4625*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4626
4627C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4628that is, the line after the last line you got.
4629You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4630
4631C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4632send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4633the following line.
4634
4635C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4636which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4637previously sent input.
4638
4639C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4640it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4641as the search string.
4642
4643*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4644automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4645
4646** C mode changes
4647
4648*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4649and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4650assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
4651definition.
4652
4653*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4654(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4655Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4656style is still the default however.
4657
4658*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4659
4660*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4661are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4662them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4663
4664*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4665and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4666
4667*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4668namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4669
4670*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4671makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4672
4673*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4674c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4675
4676*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4677should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4678package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4679variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4680
4681** Changes to hippie-expand.
4682
4683*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
4684non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4685which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4686
4687*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4688non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4689expanding dynamically.
4690
4691*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4692non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4693
4694*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4695non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4696this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4697expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4698
4699*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4700
4701** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4702
4703*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4704bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4705automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4706bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4707against the first word in the title.
4708
4709*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4710capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4711bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
4712lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
4713lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
4714bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
4715
4716*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4717generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4718replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4719bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4720
4721** Changes in vcursor.el.
4722
4723*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4724and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4725variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4726entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4727`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4728in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4729
4730*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4731Editing group once the package is loaded.
4732
4733*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4734generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4735vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4736
4737*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4738vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4739
4740** Ispell changes.
4741
4742*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4743buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
4744are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4745
4746*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4747A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4748and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4749defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
4750include:
4751
4752 o URLs are automatically skipped
4753 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4754
4755*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4756
4757** Changes to RefTeX mode
4758
4759RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4760large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4761re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4762section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4763
4764*** New recursive parser.
4765
4766The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4767entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4768recursive parser scans the individual files.
4769
4770*** Parsing only part of a document.
4771
4772Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4773partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4774the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4775
4776 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4777
4778*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4779
4780This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4781
4782 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4783
4784*** Using multiple selection buffers
4785
4786If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4787for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4788
4789 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4790
4791*** References to external documents.
4792
4793The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4794documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4795documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4796macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4797RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4798the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4799The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4800
4801*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4802
4803The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4804and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4805
4806Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4807the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4808
4809*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4810
4811The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4812buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4813
4814*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4815
4816The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4817contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4818`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4819have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4820enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4821at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4822more.
4823
4824*** Support for the varioref package
4825
4826The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4827
4828*** New hooks
4829
4830Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4831and citations are created. These hooks are
4832`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4833`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4834
4835*** Citations outside LaTeX
4836
4837The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4838a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4839
4840*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4841
4842The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4843fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4844fontified, use
4845
4846 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4847
4848** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4849With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4850the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4851directories that contain the same file name.
4852
4853Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4854Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4855file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4856Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4857have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4858names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4859directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4860directory.
4861
4862** New modes and packages
4863
4864*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4865It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4866it, but some do not.
4867
4868*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4869code.
4870
4871*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4872current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4873around in a buffer.
4874
4875Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4876
4877*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4878uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4879be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4880established system of notation similar to Chess.
4881
4882*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4883documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4884guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4885
4886*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4887available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4888system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4889simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4890functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4891the like.
4892
4893*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4894identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4895
4896*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4897within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4898used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4899the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4900
4901*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4902
4903 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4904 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4905 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4906 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4907 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4908 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4909 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4910 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4911 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4912 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4913 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4914
4915 Platform-specific modes:
4916
4917 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4918 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4919 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4920 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4921 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4922 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4923 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4924 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4925 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4926\f
4927* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4928
4929** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4930use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4931That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4932Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4933
4934Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4935you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4936consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4937
4938** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4939and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4940specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4941searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4942
4943** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4944multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4945character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4946environment.
4947
4948** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4949take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4950string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4951current input method for reading this one event.
4952
4953** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4954now control whether to output certain characters as
4955backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4956non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4957characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4958in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4959\f
4960* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4961
4962** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4963of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4964
4965** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4966in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4967always increases point by 1.
4968
4969The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4970considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4971
4972See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4973
4974** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4975Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4976default value changed. For example,
4977
4978 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4979 :type 'integer
4980 :group 'foo
4981 :version "20.3")
4982
4983 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
4984 :version "20.3")
4985
4986If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
4987default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
4988is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
4989`:version' in the top level group.
4990
4991This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
4992
4993** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
4994starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
4995
4996However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
4997symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
4998support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
4999to themselves.
5000
5001If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5002this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5003values whatever.
5004
5005** There is a new debugger command, R.
5006It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5007in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5008
5009** Frame-local variables.
5010
5011You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5012the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5013local bindings for that variable.
5014
5015These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5016frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5017modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5018parameter name.
5019
5020Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5021Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5022active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5023that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5024
5025It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5026clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5027very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5028through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5029
5030** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5031"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5032evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5033makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5034See the documentation in sregex.el.
5035
5036** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5037is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5038parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5039The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5040
5041** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5042If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5043
5044** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5045known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5046define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5047
5048** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5049when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5050it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5051history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5052
5053The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5054return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5055empty input.
5056
5057** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5058for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5059`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5060Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5061`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5062
5063** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5064echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5065a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5066default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5067
5068** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5069specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5070function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5071place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5072non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5073
5074** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5075If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5076up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5077end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5078
5079** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5080which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5081If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5082
5083** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5084holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5085was directed to display this buffer.
5086
5087** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5088with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5089describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5090other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5091set-window-configuration.
5092
5093** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5094window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5095positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5096windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5097
5098** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5099override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5100look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5101
5102If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5103non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5104map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5105
5106minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5107and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5108
5109** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5110except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5111
5112** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5113USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5114floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5115
5116** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5117to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5118in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5119it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5120
5121** Menu changes
5122
5123*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5124keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5125better supported.
5126
5127The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5128a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5129you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5130can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5131then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5132
5133*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5134
5135In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5136 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5137defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5138starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5139
5140The format is:
5141 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5142 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5143where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5144string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5145The supported properties include
5146
5147:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5148 item is enabled.
5149:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5150 item should appear in the menu.
5151:filter FILTER-FN
5152 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5153 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5154 It should return a binding to use instead.
5155:keys DESCRIPTION
5156 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5157 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5158 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5159:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5160 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5161 keyboard binding.
5162:key-sequence nil
5163 This means that the command normally has no
5164 keyboard equivalent.
5165:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5166:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5167 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5168 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5169 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5170
5171Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5172Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5173
5174(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5175
5176** New event types
5177
5178*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5179mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5180corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5181which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5182
5183 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5184
5185where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5186same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5187indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5188negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5189the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5190forward, away from the user.
5191
5192As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5193
5194*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5195files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5196and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5197filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5198loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5199
5200 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5201
5202where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5203same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5204that were dragged and dropped.
5205
5206As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5207
5208** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5209
5210*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5211any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5212to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5213
5214*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5215can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5216that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5217
5218*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5219in Emacs 19 and before.
5220
5221The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5222The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5223
5224*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5225buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5226unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5227representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5228
5229This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5230as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5231viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5232one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5233will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5234
5235This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5236representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5237(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5238consistent with the new representation.
5239
5240*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5241representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5242about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5243however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5244
5245The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5246nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5247using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5248
5249*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5250representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5251representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5252
5253The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5254loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5255is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5256
5257*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5258which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5259
5260*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5261which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5262
5263*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5264portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5265so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5266You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5267
5268*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5269it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5270
5271*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5272convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5273buffer or string being searched.
5274
5275One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5276[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5277searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5278searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5279obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5280you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5281expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5282
5283*** Structure of coding system changed.
5284
5285All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5286by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5287which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5288as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5289vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5290your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5291define-coding-system-alias.
5292
5293The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5294the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5295access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5296pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5297character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5298safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5299'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5300`iso-8859-1'.
5301
5302Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5303The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5304coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5305(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5306
5307Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5308also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5309are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5310the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5311
5312*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5313proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5314This function requires a user interaction.
5315
5316*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5317find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5318select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5319systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5320a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5321select-safe-coding-system.
5322
5323*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5324decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5325last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5326was done.
5327
5328*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5329used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5330coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5331
5332*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5333return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5334characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5335`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5336
5337*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5338coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5339coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5340converted.
5341
5342*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5343coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5344
5345*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5346character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5347character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5348each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5349either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5350range of characters.
5351
5352*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5353Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5354
5355*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5356in the current buffer at position POS.
5357
5358*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5359input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5360function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5361character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5362event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5363binding input-method-function to nil.
5364
5365The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5366method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5367input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5368the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5369not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5370
5371The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5372subsequent events of a key sequence.
5373
5374*** You can customize any language environment by using
5375set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5376
5377The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5378customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5379instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5380environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5381exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5382\f
5383* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5384
5385** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5386options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5387at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5388tree structure.
5389
5390M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5391user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5392
5393With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5394session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5395in your .emacs file.)
5396
5397** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5398You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5399
5400** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5401This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5402
5403** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5404immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5405kills the region.
5406
5407The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5408delete the character before point, as usual.
5409
5410** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5411on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5412by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5413
5414** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5415insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5416the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5417onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5418history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5419past.)
5420
5421** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5422This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5423in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5424TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5425makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5426
5427As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5428and is an alias for it.
5429
5430If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5431use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5432
5433** Scrolling changes
5434
5435*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5436position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5437
5438In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5439on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5440where it started.
5441
5442*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5443move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5444screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5445does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5446
5447*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5448top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5449comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5450recenters the window.
5451
5452** International character set support (MULE)
5453
5454Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5455including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5456Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5457Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5458features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5459MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5460
5461Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5462coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5463character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5464variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5465into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5466
5467Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5468generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5469supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5470language, to make it possible to type them.
5471
5472The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5473character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5474
5475The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5476to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5477
5478You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5479
5480 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5481
5482Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5483characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5484argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5485already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5486characters for their work until they want to change.
5487
5488*** Input methods
5489
5490An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5491specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5492has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5493the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5494support several input methods.
5495
5496The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5497another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5498work.
5499
5500A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5501characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5502composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5503consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5504sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5505letter.
5506
5507The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5508by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5509First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5510marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5511mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5512
5513None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5514they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5515phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5516converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5517
5518Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5519word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5520typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5521the first guess is wrong.
5522
5523*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5524turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5525
5526If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5527byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5528they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5529the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5530
5531However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5532use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5533includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5534translate automatically to and from either one.
5535
5536*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5537
5538Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5539file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5540sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5541what you want.
5542
5543If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5544example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5545system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5546multibyte characters in that buffer.
5547
5548If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5549character conversion as well.
5550
5551*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5552
5553A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5554Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5555requires using many fonts.
5556
5557Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5558collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5559
5560A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5561the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5562have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5563you would use a font.
5564
5565If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5566specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5567display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5568
5569The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5570(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5571characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5572or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5573and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5574
5575*** Defining fontsets.
5576
5577Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5578chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5579with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5580
5581Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5582of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5583`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5584standard fontset are created automatically.
5585
5586If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5587argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5588FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5589with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5590name is `fontset-startup'.
5591
5592Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5593The resource value should have this form:
5594 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5595FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5596 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5597 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5598 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5599The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5600of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5601CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5602FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5603
5604Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5605last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5606You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5607
5608For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5609font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5610following resource,
5611 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5612the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5613 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5614Here is the substitution rule:
5615 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5616 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5617 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5618 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5619 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5620
5621The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5622fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5623that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5624
5625With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5626like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5627name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5628fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5629fontsets.
5630
5631*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5632defaults for a particular choice of language.
5633
5634Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5635method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5636visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5637already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5638language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5639system for new files that you create.
5640
5641It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5642set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5643whole Emacs session.
5644
5645For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5646chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5647with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5648
5649*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5650specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5651specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5652the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5653coding systems that Emacs supports.
5654
5655*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5656lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5657This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5658After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5659is used for *the immediately following command*.
5660
5661So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5662write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5663
5664If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5665then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5666
5667For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5668visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5669
5670*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5671construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5672to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5673specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5674of the file.
5675
5676*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5677the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5678code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5679translated into that character code.
5680
5681This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5682various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5683
5684By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5685
5686*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5687the coding system for keyboard input.
5688
5689Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5690with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5691some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5692
5693By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5694
5695Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5696input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5697translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5698to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5699designed to work with terminals.
5700
5701*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5702specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5703This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5704has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5705translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5706in the corresponding buffer.
5707
5708By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5709
5710*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5711to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5712It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5713
5714*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5715an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5716command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5717want to use.
5718
5719C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5720method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5721
5722*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5723layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5724remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5725which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5726
5727*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5728the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5729related information.
5730
5731*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5732HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5733scripts.
5734
5735*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5736information about the support for a particular language.
5737You specify the language as an argument.
5738
5739*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5740the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5741first dash.
5742
5743A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5744(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5745whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
57461 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5747
5748 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5749 B big5 (Chinese)
5750 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5751 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5752 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5753 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5754 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5755 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5756 K euc-korea (Korean)
5757 R koi8 (Russian)
5758 Q tibetan
5759 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5760 T lao
5761 T tis620 (Thai)
5762 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5763 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5764 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5765 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5766 z hz (Chinese)
5767
5768When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5769two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5770coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5771keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5772
5773*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5774conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5775
5776When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5777into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5778rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5779Rmail files themselves.
5780
5781*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5782conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5783
5784Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5785for sending mail:
5786
5787- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5788- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5789- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5790 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5791- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5792
5793*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5794to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5795Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5796translations.
5797
5798** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5799of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5800insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5801without any conversion.
5802
5803** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5804You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5805RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5806any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5807
5808** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5809functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5810
5811Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5812Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5813
5814Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5815mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5816
5817** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5818complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5819in the buffer before point.
5820
5821With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5822symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5823you are using.
5824
5825With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5826just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5827
5828** File locking works with NFS now.
5829
5830The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5831in the same directory as FILENAME.
5832
5833This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5834works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5835can become a bottleneck.
5836
5837The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5838does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5839create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5840file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5841rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5842so useful that the change is worth while.
5843
5844When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5845are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5846collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5847tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5848
5849** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5850it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5851show-paren-mode.
5852
5853** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5854selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5855delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5856
5857** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5858within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5859complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5860
5861** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5862it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5863set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5864
5865** Changes in View mode.
5866
5867*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5868Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5869
5870*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5871view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5872
5873*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5874previous state.
5875
5876*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5877scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5878
5879*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5880non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5881not just the selected window.
5882
5883*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5884read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5885turns View mode on or off.
5886
5887*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5888how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5889delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5890
5891** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5892now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5893
5894** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5895has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5896presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5897which version to compare with.
5898
5899** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
5900blocks if a match is inside the block.
5901
5902The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5903is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5904isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5905shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5906
5907By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5908of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5909blocks, all of them or none.
5910
5911** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5912current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5913confirmation first.
5914
5915** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5916now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5917However, the mode will not be changed if
5918(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5919(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5920 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5921(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5922
5923This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5924
5925However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5926these commands do not change the major mode.
5927
5928** M-x occur changes.
5929
5930*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5931it performs a case-sensitive search.
5932
5933*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5934if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5935using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5936
5937** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5938in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5939window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5940that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5941buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5942
5943** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5944after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5945appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5946come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5947
5948** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5949selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5950buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5951
5952** Outline mode changes.
5953
5954*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5955
5956*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5957
5958** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5959you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5960Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5961was already active.
5962
5963The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5964unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5965get confused by it.
5966
5967If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5968set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5969
5970** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5971
5972*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5973conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5974character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5975including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5976
5977The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5978mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5979copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5980
5981*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5982are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5983values.
5984
5985`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5986case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
5987`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
5988case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
5989
5990** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
5991certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
5992can be. The default value is 30.
5993
5994** Changes in Mail mode.
5995
5996*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
5997Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
5998composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
5999`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6000`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6001behavior.
6002
6003C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6004compose-mail-other-frame.
6005
6006*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6007the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6008replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6009buffer that shows the original message.
6010
6011*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6012with separator lines around the contents.
6013
6014*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6015in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6016definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6017need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6018
6019*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6020
6021**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6022for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6023controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6024Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6025
6026**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6027to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6028/etc/passwd.
6029
6030**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6031to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6032/etc/passwd.
6033
6034** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6035special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6036directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6037reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6038
6039Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6040when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6041be taken to be magic.
6042
6043** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6044files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6045available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6046
6047M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6048(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6049
6050** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6051suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6052
6053In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6054
6055new key dired.el binding old key
6056------- ---------------- -------
6057 * c dired-change-marks c
6058 * m dired-mark m
6059 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6060 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6061 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6062 * u dired-unmark u
6063 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6064 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6065 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6066 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6067 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6068 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6069
6070** Rmail changes.
6071
6072*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6073saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6074chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6075each time you run it.
6076
6077*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6078whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6079
6080*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6081messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6082means to move in the opposite direction.
6083
6084*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6085you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6086
6087*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6088just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6089It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6090can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6091for output.
6092
6093** Gnus changes.
6094
6095*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6096
6097*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6098Gnus.
6099
6100*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6101`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6102
6103*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6104article mode line.
6105
6106*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6107
6108*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6109
6110(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6111
6112*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6113are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6114`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6115
6116*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6117
6118*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6119
6120*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6121See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6122
6123*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6124Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6125used to pick articles.
6126
6127*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6128another have been added.
6129
6130 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6131
6132*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6133generating lines in buffers.
6134
6135*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6136`M-C-_'.
6137
6138*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6139
6140*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6141
6142 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6143
6144*** Scores can be decayed.
6145
6146 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6147
6148*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6149Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6150
6151*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6152the native server.
6153
6154 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6155
6156*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6157(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6158
6159*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6160
6161*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6162even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6163
6164*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6165(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6166
6167 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6168 a group.
6169
6170*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6171sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6172
6173 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6174
6175*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6176
6177 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6178
6179*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6180
6181 Use the `Y c' command.
6182
6183*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6184
6185*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6186
6187 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6188
6189*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6190from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6191
6192 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6193
6194*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6195
6196*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6197the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6198
6199 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6200
6201Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6202and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6203from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6204hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6205this issue.)
6206
6207Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6208automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6209particular news group. This can be done by:
6210
6211 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6212
6213Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6214of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6215"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6216system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6217for reading and posting).
6218
6219CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6220 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6221Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6222newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6223there.
6224
6225Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6226default. Here are some of these default settings:
6227
6228 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6229 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6230 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6231 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6232 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6233
6234When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6235the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6236
6237** CC mode changes.
6238
6239*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6240code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6241values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6242this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6243Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6244loaded.
6245
6246If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6247Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6248style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6249share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6250c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6251must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6252
6253*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6254of the current buffer.
6255
6256*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6257it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6258of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6259
6260*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6261style that the Python developers like.
6262
6263*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6264This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6265just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6266
6267** VC Changes [new]
6268
6269** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6270name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6271directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6272
6273This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6274master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6275developers.
6276
6277You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6278RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6279
6280*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6281other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6282writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6283calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6284
6285*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6286version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6287
6288** Calendar changes.
6289
6290A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6291of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6292for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6293
6294** ps-print changes
6295
6296There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6297
6298*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6299
6300The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6301formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6302`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6303`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6304It defaults to `letter'.
6305If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6306
6307The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6308of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6309non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6310
6311The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6312It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6313It defaults to 1.
6314
6315*** Horizontal layout
6316
6317The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6318`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6319All are measured in points.
6320
6321*** Vertical layout
6322
6323The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6324`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6325All are measured in points.
6326
6327*** Headers
6328
6329If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6330`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6331margin above the text.
6332
6333If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6334framing box is printed around the header.
6335
6336The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6337`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6338
6339The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6340`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6341`ps-header-font-size'.
6342
6343*** Font managing
6344
6345The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6346used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6347`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6348elements to this alist.
6349
6350The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6351for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6352
6353** hideshow changes.
6354
6355*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6356C++, ; for lisp).
6357
6358*** Support for java-mode added.
6359
6360*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6361in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6362
6363*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6364the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6365way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6366
6367*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6368robust and a lot faster.
6369
6370*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
6371
6372*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6373to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6374documentation for more details.
6375
6376** Changes in Enriched mode.
6377
6378*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6379filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6380of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6381use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6382the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6383
6384*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6385distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6386as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6387as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6388
6389** Font Lock mode
6390
6391*** Custom support
6392
6393The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6394font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6395faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6396group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6397your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6398consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6399
6400You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6401
6402*** Maximum decoration
6403
6404Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6405default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6406of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6407supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6408to get the old behavior.
6409
6410*** New support
6411
6412Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6413
6414Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6415support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6416
6417*** Configurable support
6418
6419Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6420additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6421c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6422java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6423list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6424of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6425convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6426
6427Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6428way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6429it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6430
6431*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6432
6433You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6434highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6435for any mode.
6436
6437For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6438
6439 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6440
6441in your ~/.emacs.
6442
6443*** New faces
6444
6445Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6446font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6447distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6448to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6449
6450*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6451
6452The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6453cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6454same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6455
6456*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6457
6458The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6459according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6460the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6461non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6462refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6463the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6464Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6465
6466This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6467For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6468this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6469refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6470containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6471the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6472
6473As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6474
6475Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6476Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6477Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6478new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6479
6480If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6481settings.
6482
6483** Ada mode changes.
6484
6485*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6486If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6487procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6488you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6489stubs.
6490
6491*** There are two new commands:
6492 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6493 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6494
6495The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6496`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
6497`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
6498
6499*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6500is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6501Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6502
6503*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6504formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6505places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6506space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6507
6508** Scheme mode changes.
6509
6510*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6511mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6512for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6513with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6514have any effect.
6515
6516If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6517still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6518scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6519variables as buffer-local variables.
6520
6521*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6522Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6523
6524** Changes to the emacsclient program
6525
6526*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6527USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6528associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6529can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6530
6531*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
6532it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6533buffer in Emacs.
6534
6535*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6536use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6537ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6538option takes precedence.
6539
6540** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6541constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6542(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6543
6544** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6545which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6546the current defun.
6547
6548** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6549following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6550
6551** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6552and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6553necessary).
6554
6555** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6556if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6557these register values no longer become completely useless.
6558If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6559asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6560it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6561
6562** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6563example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6564be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6565you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6566
6567You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6568variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6569file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6570revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6571only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6572
6573** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6574since it applies only to the current frame.
6575
6576** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6577file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6578and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6579
6580This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6581multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6582variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6583tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6584instead of just the file you are editing.
6585
6586** RefTeX mode
6587
6588RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6589and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6590different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6591multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6592turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6593
6594C-c ( reftex-label
6595 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6596 knows which kind of label is needed.
6597
6598C-c ) reftex-reference
6599 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6600 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6601
6602C-c [ reftex-citation
6603 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6604 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6605
6606C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6607 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6608
6609C-c = reftex-toc
6610 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6611 can quickly jump to every section.
6612
6613Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6614commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6615Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6616reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6617C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6618
6619** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6620
6621*** Info documentation is now available.
6622
6623*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6624both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6625
6626*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6627bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6628
6629*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6630(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6631
6632*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6633entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6634appropriate functions.
6635
6636*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6637entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6638
6639*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6640been cleaned.
6641
6642*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6643bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6644
6645*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6646shall be delimited.
6647
6648*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6649bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6650bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6651
6652*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6653field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6654prefixed with `ALT'.
6655
6656*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6657bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6658formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6659documentation).
6660
6661*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6662documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6663for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6664
6665*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6666comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6667
6668*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6669alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6670signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6671
6672*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6673
6674*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6675
6676*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6677from alien sources.
6678
6679*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6680to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6681crossref entries.
6682
6683*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6684region.
6685
6686*** Added support for imenu.
6687
6688*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6689of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6690`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6691`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6692
6693*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6694from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6695
6696** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6697
6698** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
6699
6700** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6701functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6702Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6703as an argument.
6704
6705When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6706and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6707
6708** browse-url changes
6709
6710*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6711Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6712(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6713non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6714customization variables.
6715
6716*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6717
6718*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6719lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6720(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6721
6722** Changes in Ediff
6723
6724*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6725pops up the Info file for this command.
6726
6727*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6728the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6729merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6730directories).
6731
6732*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6733and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6734files in the same directory.
6735
6736*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6737The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6738related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6739
6740** Changes in Viper
6741
6742*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
6743*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
6744 instead of vip-.
6745*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
6746*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
6747Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6748*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6749*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6750*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6751color when Viper is in insert state.
6752*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6753Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6754viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6755
6756** Etags changes.
6757
6758*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6759default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6760Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6761variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6762not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6763
6764*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6765
6766*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6767constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6768
6769*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6770recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6771In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6772
6773*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6774C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6775recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6776methods and protocols.
6777
6778*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6779.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6780column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6781paragraph name.
6782
6783*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6784an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6785at least M times and as many as N times.
6786
6787** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6788in files has changed slightly.
6789
6790With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6791time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6792This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6793with old time-stamp-format values.
6794
6795In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6796(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6797This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6798reasons.
6799
6800In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6801natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6802fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6803(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6804time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6805specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6806
6807Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6808case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6809truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6810
6811The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6812being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6813future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6814recommended now will continue to work then.
6815
6816See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6817details.
6818
6819** There are some additional major modes:
6820
6821dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6822m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6823meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6824
6825** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6826copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6827into Emacs.
6828
6829** New Lisp packages include:
6830
6831*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6832
6833*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6834be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6835
6836*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6837
6838*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6839in shell buffers.
6840
6841*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6842See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6843and `elint-defun'.
6844
6845*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6846meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6847ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6848strings or comments.
6849
6850These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6851abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6852you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6853insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6854at these points.
6855
6856*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6857can visit them by short forms of their names.
6858
6859*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6860Emacs Lisp function at point.
6861
6862*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6863
6864*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6865switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6866
6867*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6868
6869*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6870
6871*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6872
6873*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6874from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6875
6876*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6877You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6878inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6879original place after inserting the copy.
6880
6881*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6882on the buffer.
6883
6884You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6885velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6886(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6887
6888Enable mouse-drag with:
6889 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6890-or-
6891 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6892
6893*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6894mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6895
6896*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6897It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6898
6899*** ogonek
6900
6901The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6902Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6903platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6904TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6905ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6906prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6907instance) and vice versa.
6908
6909To use this package load it using
6910 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6911Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
6912 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
6913 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6914The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6915ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6916
6917*** Interface to ph.
6918
6919Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6920
6921The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6922services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6923these servers.
6924
6925*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6926
6927*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6928You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6929while the real cursor does not move.
6930
6931*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6932for visiting your favorite web sites.
6933
6934*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6935so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6936
6937** movemail change
6938
6939Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6940mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6941supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6942user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6943
6944This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6945\f
6946* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6947
6948** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6949
6950Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6951end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6952Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6953file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6954file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6955
6956To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6957C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6958coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6959specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6960LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6961save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6962\f
6963* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6964
6965** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6966Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6967vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6968Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6969
6970** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6971to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6972
6973In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6974don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6975"win".
6976
6977** Basic Lisp changes
6978
6979*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6980evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6981
6982*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6983be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6984or by the user.
6985
6986The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
6987
6988*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
6989
6990(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
6991(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
6992
6993*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
6994usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
6995its argument.
6996
6997*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
6998
6999*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7000
7001*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7002
7003*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7004error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7005include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7006`format' function.
7007
7008*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7009or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7010whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7011
7012*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7013either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7014adding one of these suffixes.
7015
7016*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7017which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7018If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7019
7020We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7021because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7022
7023*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7024
7025*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7026You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7027
7028*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7029conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7030
7031 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7032
7033BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7034BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7035
7036*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7037choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7038restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7039works using `save-current-buffer'.
7040
7041*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7042write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7043of the last form.
7044
7045*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7046which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7047last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7048as the last form.
7049
7050*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7051characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7052matches.
7053
7054For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7055
7056*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7057with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7058Then it returns that string.
7059
7060For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7061
7062(with-output-to-string
7063 (princ "The buffer is ")
7064 (princ (buffer-name)))
7065
7066returns "The buffer is foo".
7067
7068** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7069is non-nil.
7070
7071These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7072buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7073characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7074
7075*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7076a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7077
7078Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7079character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7080Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7081position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7082characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7083 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7084
7085ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7086Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7087non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7088characters".
7089
7090The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7091through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7092"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7093range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7094leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7095
7096*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7097(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7098multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7099character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7100
7101This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7102always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7103
7104However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7105
7106*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7107because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7108have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7109the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7110guaranteed.
7111
7112*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7113between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7114character).
7115
7116When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7117
7118 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7119 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7120 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7121 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7122 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7123
7124*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7125
7126*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7127`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7128more than the number of characters.
7129
7130You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7131it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7132\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7133is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7134follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7135newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7136
7137*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7138and returns a string containing those characters.
7139
7140*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7141(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7142counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7143character, sref signals an error.
7144
7145*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7146in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7147string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7148
7149*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7150in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7151region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7152
7153*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7154the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7155to a vector of the characters in it.
7156
7157*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7158of a string. You call it as follows:
7159
7160 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7161
7162This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7163STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7164This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7165Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7166it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7167
7168*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7169if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7170
7171*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7172if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7173
7174*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7175to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7176not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7177which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7178
7179(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7180
7181This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7182
7183The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7184If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7185are not included in the resulting value.
7186
7187The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7188at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7189WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7190is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7191
7192If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7193place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7194character extends across that column), then the padding character
7195PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7196string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7197column START-COLUMN.
7198
7199*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7200the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7201necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7202difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7203changed text, before the change.
7204
7205*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7206sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7207one character set for each script, not for each language.
7208
7209**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7210
7211**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7212
7213**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7214set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7215
7216**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7217name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7218which identify the character within that character set.
7219
7220**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7221byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7222opposite of split-char.
7223
7224**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7225of all the characters between BEG and END.
7226
7227**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7228of all the characters in a string.
7229
7230*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7231and specifying coding systems.
7232
7233**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7234system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7235of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7236(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7237and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7238as what to do about code conversion.)
7239
7240**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7241name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7242
7243**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7244for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7245except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7246
7247Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7248which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7249to match against a file name.
7250
7251VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7252a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7253decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7254to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7255systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7256specifies the coding system for encoding.
7257
7258If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7259or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7260
7261**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7262the coding system to use for network sockets.
7263
7264Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7265which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7266either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7267service names.
7268
7269VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7270a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7271decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7272to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7273systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7274specifies the coding system for encoding.
7275
7276If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7277or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7278
7279**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7280for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7281except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7282start the subprocess.
7283
7284**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7285systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7286when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7287(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7288to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7289
7290**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7291coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7292subprocess.
7293
7294It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7295but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7296start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7297connection permanently or until overridden.
7298
7299The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7300file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7301network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7302coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7303It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7304system for one operation at a time.
7305
7306**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7307files, subprocesses or network connections.
7308
7309**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7310coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7311The value is a cons cell,
7312 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7313where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7314the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7315input to the subprocess.
7316
7317**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7318change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7319
7320** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7321customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7322you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7323
7324You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7325variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7326information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7327legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7328customization.
7329
7330Thus, instead of writing
7331
7332 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7333 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7334
7335you would now write this:
7336
7337 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7338 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7339 :type 'boolean
7340 :group foo)
7341
7342The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7343two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7344describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7345for a description of them.
7346
7347The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7348should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7349
7350 (defgroup ispell nil
7351 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7352 :group 'processes)
7353
7354The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7355group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7356but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7357to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7358second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7359
7360Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7361package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7362have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7363package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7364first-level subgroups.
7365
7366** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7367
7368This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7369separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7370
7371** easy-mmode
7372
7373The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7374developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7375only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7376predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7377`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7378`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7379
7380** Text property changes
7381
7382*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7383text property.
7384
7385*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7386previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7387place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7388functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7389starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7390
7391If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7392LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7393of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7394position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7395
7396*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7397value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7398is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7399
7400** Changes in invisibility features
7401
7402*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7403hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7404is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7405should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7406would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7407make the overlay visible.
7408
7409During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7410invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7411needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7412which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7413the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7414t when it should hide it.
7415
7416*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7417
7418Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
7419invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7420and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
7421Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
7422manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
7423Here is an example of how to do this:
7424
7425 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
7426 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7427 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
7428 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7429
7430 ...
7431 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7432
7433 ...
7434 ;; When done with the overlays:
7435 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7436 ;; Or respectively:
7437 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7438
7439** Changes in syntax parsing.
7440
7441*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7442`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7443obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7444`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7445
7446If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7447is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7448used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7449
7450When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7451character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7452
7453 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7454 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7455
7456 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7457 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7458 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7459
7460 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7461 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7462 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7463 determine the syntax type of the character.
7464
7465 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7466 of the current buffer.
7467
7468*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7469value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7470for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7471
7472*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7473and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7474only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7475character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7476another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7477
7478These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7479text property.
7480
7481*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7482arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7483of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7484
7485*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7486(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7487element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7488nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7489string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7490
7491*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7492syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7493`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7494
7495** Changes in face features
7496
7497*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7498if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7499
7500*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7501of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7502
7503*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7504set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7505
7506*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7507set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7508
7509*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7510by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7511and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7512the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7513overlay property).
7514
7515This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7516arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7517
7518** Changes in file-handling functions
7519
7520*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7521directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7522they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7523is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7524
7525This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7526begins with ~.
7527
7528*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7529it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7530
7531*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7532the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7533
7534*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7535as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7536
7537*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7538character code conversion as well as other things.
7539
7540Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7541(formerly it did not).
7542
7543*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7544environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7545
7546*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7547instead of constant strings.
7548
7549*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7550to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7551any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7552
7553substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7554in the same way as before.
7555
7556*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7557The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7558which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7559
7560*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7561error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7562else, and returns nil.
7563
7564*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7565directory cannot be listed.
7566
7567** Changes in minibuffer input
7568
7569*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7570read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7571additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7572argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7573ways:
7574
7575 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7576 It is available through the history command M-n.
7577
7578*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7579read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7580argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7581minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7582enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7583
7584In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7585argument in this way.
7586
7587*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7588from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7589minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7590
7591** Echo area features
7592
7593*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7594echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7595minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7596after the echo area is cleared.
7597
7598*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7599in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7600
7601** Keyboard input features
7602
7603*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7604set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7605
7606*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7607received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7608by keyboard macros.
7609
7610** Frame-related changes
7611
7612*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7613creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7614hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7615
7616*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7617the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7618has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7619
7620*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7621selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7622value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7623in the selected frame.
7624
7625*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7626is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7627which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7628
7629** X Windows features
7630
7631*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7632x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7633x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7634
7635*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7636The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7637
7638*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7639MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7640A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7641
7642If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7643it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7644
7645** Subprocess features
7646
7647*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7648functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7649automatically.
7650
7651*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7652and returns the output from the command as a string.
7653
7654*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7655and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7656
7657** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7658does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7659
7660** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7661at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7662goes after the other menu items.
7663
7664** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
7665of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
7666around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7667are in use.
7668
7669The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7670series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7671
7672Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7673after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7674form.
7675
7676** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7677is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7678but its hook is still run.
7679
7680** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7681for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7682
7683If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7684regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7685useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7686
7687This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7688are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7689filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7690warned.
7691
7692** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7693way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7694
7695** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7696integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7697functions like display-time.
7698
7699** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7700name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7701
7702** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7703can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7704is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7705
7706** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7707if there is an error in compilation.
7708
7709** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7710switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7711argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7712they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7713
7714** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7715Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7716the *scratch* buffer.
7717
7718** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7719The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7720where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7721e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7722
7723** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7724and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7725It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7726
7727** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7728using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7729variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7730and compose-mail-other-frame.
7731
7732** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7733can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7734full name of the specified user will be returned.
7735
7736** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7737of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7738where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7739in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7740option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7741files at all.
7742
7743** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7744and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7745width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7746the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7747
7748For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7749minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7750with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7751is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7752
7753** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7754
7755** imenu.el changes.
7756
7757You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
7758item from menu created by imenu.
7759
7760An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7761#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7762select one of those items.
7763\f
7764* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7765\f
7766* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7767
7768** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7769mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7770
7771** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7772use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7773Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7774\f
7775* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7776
7777** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7778To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7779
7780** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7781conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7782matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7783expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7784word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7785all caps.
7786
7787** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7788at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7789
7790When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7791does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7792as in previous Emacs versions.
7793
7794** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7795non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7796time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7797frames.
7798
7799** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7800if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7801This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7802Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7803accident.
7804
7805** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7806keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7807It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7808line and then executing the macro.
7809
7810This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7811
7812** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7813(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7814characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7815characters.
7816
7817** Font Lock mode
7818
7819*** Font Lock support modes
7820
7821Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7822below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7823hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7824to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7825Font Lock mode is enabled.
7826
7827For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7828
7829 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7830
7831in your ~/.emacs.
7832
7833*** lazy-lock
7834
7835The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7836only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7837becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7838Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7839occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7840buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7841Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7842
7843To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7844
7845 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7846
7847To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7848
7849** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7850
7851*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7852paren and key.
7853
7854*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7855supported.
7856
7857** Gnus changes.
7858
7859Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7860commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7861significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7862previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7863
7864Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7865between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7866
7867*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
7868variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7869obsolete.
7870
7871*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7872missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7873
7874 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7875
7876*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7877
7878 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7879
7880*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
7881referred.
7882
7883*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7884
7885 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7886
7887*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7888
7889 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7890
7891*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
7892buffers.
7893
7894 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7895
7896*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7897
7898 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7899
7900*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7901
7902 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7903
7904*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7905
7906 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7907
7908*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7909is possible.
7910
7911 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7912
7913*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7914groups of groups.
7915
7916*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7917
7918*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
7919batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
7920
7921*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7922
7923*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7924
7925*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7926
7927 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7928
7929*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7930expiration times.
7931
7932*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7933
7934*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7935process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7936
7937*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7938articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7939bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7940
7941*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7942articles with the `*' command.
7943
7944*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7945
7946*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7947
7948 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7949
7950*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7951
7952*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
7953`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7954
7955*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
7956buffer.
7957
7958*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7959
7960*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7961
7962*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7963
7964 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7965
7966*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
7967
7968 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7969
7970*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
7971
7972*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7973
7974*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
7975
7976 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
7977 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7978
7979*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
7980refetching.
7981
7982 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7983
7984*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7985buffer to allow easier treatment.
7986
7987*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
7988
7989*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
7990
7991 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
7992
7993*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
7994articles.
7995
7996 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
7997
7998*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
7999
8000*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8001cited text to hide is now customizable.
8002
8003 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8004
8005*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8006
8007 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8008
8009*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8010
8011*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8012
8013The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8014in greater detail.
8015\f
8016* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8017
8018** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8019second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8020asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8021exists.
8022
8023** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8024as well as lists.
8025
8026** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8027of a given keymap.
8028
8029** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8030given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8031keymap or nil.
8032
8033** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8034an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8035name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8036menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8037equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8038alias.
8039\f
8040* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8041
8042** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8043
8044Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8045This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8046was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8047far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8048pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8049
8050For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8051you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8052`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8053
8054** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8055
8056The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8057do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8058It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8059much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8060chapter of the manual for details.
8061
8062However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8063customization variables take effect.
8064
8065** Marking with the mouse.
8066
8067When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8068highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8069using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8070
8071** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8072
8073*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8074
8075*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8076to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8077
8078*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8079in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8080you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8081application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8082applications, these problems are significant.
8083
8084If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8085likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8086However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8087will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8088other DOS application as a subprocess.
8089
8090Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8091You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8092
8093If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8094subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8095have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8096Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8097separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8098Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8099
8100** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8101
8102This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8103which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8104minibuffer contains.
8105
8106** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8107
8108The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8109It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8110It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8111affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8112
8113The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8114it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8115and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8116when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8117
8118** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8119enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8120
8121** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8122F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8123Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8124
8125If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8126menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8127something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8128the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8129
8130 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8131
8132** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8133to replace the characters it "deletes".
8134
8135** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8136
8137** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8138a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8139select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8140It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8141immediately after the selected one.
8142
8143This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8144made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8145
8146** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8147
8148Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8149directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8150If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8151Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8152recover-session.
8153
8154You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8155auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8156will not work.
8157
8158Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8159normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8160this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8161bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8162now that the bug is fixed.
8163
8164** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8165
8166There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8167when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8168Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8169which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8170
8171If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8172telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8173VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8174the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8175
8176** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8177Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8178is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8179
8180There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8181Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8182enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8183The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8184remain normal.
8185
8186** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8187header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8188
8189Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8190known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8191offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8192Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8193
8194Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8195of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8196a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8197name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8198documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8199`mail-directory-stream'.)
8200
8201** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8202skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8203characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8204with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8205
8206Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8207- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8208wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8209
8210The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8211less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8212headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8213Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8214Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8215fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8216to a limitation in font-lock).
8217
8218External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8219
8220** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8221buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8222buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8223this example:
8224
8225 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8226 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8227
8228** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8229
8230*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8231
8232*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8233
8234*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8235
8236*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8237entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8238will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8239isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8240(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8241The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8242
8243*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8244does the same job.
8245
8246*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8247"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8248
8249*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8250text.
8251
8252** Font Lock mode
8253
8254*** Global Font Lock mode
8255
8256Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8257new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8258font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8259turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8260on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8261
8262For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8263
8264 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8265
8266in your ~/.emacs.
8267
8268*** Local Refontification
8269
8270In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8271However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8272those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8273command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8274
8275In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8276(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8277current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8278above and below point.
8279
8280With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8281
8282** Follow mode
8283
8284Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8285buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8286side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8287they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8288split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8289follow-mode.
8290
8291M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8292
8293To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8294command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8295
8296** hide-show changes.
8297
8298The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8299to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8300normal hooks.
8301
8302** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8303The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8304
8305** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8306recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8307those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8308
8309** MSDOS Changes
8310
8311*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8312Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8313
8314*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8315and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8316
8317*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8318
8319*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8320pressing both mouse buttons.
8321
8322*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8323restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8324are:
8325
8326**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8327now works.
8328
8329**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8330
8331**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8332implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8333
8334**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8335
8336**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8337
8338**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8339
8340**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8341
8342**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8343\f
8344* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8345
8346** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8347tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8348remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8349this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8350behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8351
8352** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8353
8354The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8355not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8356need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8357be different.
8358
8359It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8360than `system-type'.
8361
8362See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8363
8364** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8365now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8366
8367** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8368that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8369
8370** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8371no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8372reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8373
8374The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8375to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8376like this:
8377
8378 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8379
8380SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8381It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8382becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8383
8384REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8385seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8386means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8387
8388*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8389up if too much time passes.
8390
8391 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8392
8393This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8394If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8395of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8396form in BODY.
8397
8398*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8399a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8400call looks like this:
8401
8402 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8403
8404SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8405runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8406timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8407ARGS.
8408
8409Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8410command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8411command.
8412
8413REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8414time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8415does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8416each time Emacs becomes idle.
8417
8418If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8419idle for SECS seconds.
8420
8421*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8422all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8423programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8424instead.
8425
8426*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8427there is no answer within a certain time.
8428
8429 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8430
8431asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8432within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8433Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8434
8435** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8436arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8437meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8438arguments in between are ignored.
8439
8440This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8441the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8442
8443** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8444/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8445/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8446site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8447version.
8448
8449It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8450version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8451for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8452has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8453and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8454problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8455
8456** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8457.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8458systems with limited file name syntax.
8459
8460Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8461convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8462for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8463completions.el:
8464
8465(defvar save-completions-file-name
8466 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8467 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8468
8469This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8470depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8471convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8472Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8473MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8474
8475** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8476rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8477minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8478
8479** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8480marker from its buffer position.
8481
8482** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8483Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8484The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8485
8486** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8487that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8488condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8489of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8490matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8491regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8492
8493This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8494errors that happen often during editing.
8495
8496** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8497into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8498puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8499
8500** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8501now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8502
8503** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8504a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8505name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8506to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8507and not get-buffer-window.
8508
8509** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8510calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8511being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8512
8513If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8514buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8515property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8516non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8517are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8518property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8519over and over for the same text.
8520
8521** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8522
8523*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8524in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8525
8526;; @(#) HEADER: text
8527;; $HEADER: text $
8528
8529in addition to the normal
8530
8531;; HEADER: text
8532
8533*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8534checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8535lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8536
8537
a933dad1 8538\f
3787e12e 8539* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
8540
8541----------------------------------------------------------------------
8542Copyright information:
8543
424d8b44 8544Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8545
8546 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8547 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8548 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8549 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8550
8551 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8552 of this document, or of portions of it,
8553 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8554 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8555\f
8556Local variables:
8557mode: outline
8558paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8559end: